TW559632B - Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same - Google Patents

Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW559632B
TW559632B TW090126284A TW90126284A TW559632B TW 559632 B TW559632 B TW 559632B TW 090126284 A TW090126284 A TW 090126284A TW 90126284 A TW90126284 A TW 90126284A TW 559632 B TW559632 B TW 559632B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
layer
fiber
plane
pattern
region
Prior art date
Application number
TW090126284A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
David William Cabell
Paul Dennis Trokhan
Original Assignee
Procter & Gamble
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/694,929 external-priority patent/US6420100B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/694,915 external-priority patent/US6576090B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/694,946 external-priority patent/US6576091B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/695,155 external-priority patent/US6743571B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/695,117 external-priority patent/US6660129B1/en
Application filed by Procter & Gamble filed Critical Procter & Gamble
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW559632B publication Critical patent/TW559632B/en

Links

Classifications

    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D04BRAIDING; LACE-MAKING; KNITTING; TRIMMINGS; NON-WOVEN FABRICS
    • D04HMAKING TEXTILE FABRICS, e.g. FROM FIBRES OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL; FABRICS MADE BY SUCH PROCESSES OR APPARATUS, e.g. FELTS, NON-WOVEN FABRICS; COTTON-WOOL; WADDING ; NON-WOVEN FABRICS FROM STAPLE FIBRES, FILAMENTS OR YARNS, BONDED WITH AT LEAST ONE WEB-LIKE MATERIAL DURING THEIR CONSOLIDATION
    • D04H3/00Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length
    • D04H3/08Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length characterised by the method of strengthening or consolidating
    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D21PAPER-MAKING; PRODUCTION OF CELLULOSE
    • D21FPAPER-MAKING MACHINES; METHODS OF PRODUCING PAPER THEREON
    • D21F11/00Processes for making continuous lengths of paper, or of cardboard, or of wet web for fibre board production, on paper-making machines
    • D21F11/006Making patterned paper
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/12Production of screen printing forms or similar printing forms, e.g. stencils

Abstract

A fibrous structure having at least a first region defining a first plane and having a first elevation, and a second region outwardly extending from the first plane to define a second elevation, wherein the second region comprises a plurality of fibrous pillows. At least some of the fibrous pillows comprise fibrous domes and fibrous cantilever portions laterally extending therefrom at the second elevation. The cantilever portions are elevated from the first plane to form pocket therebetween. In a cross-section perpendicular to the first plane the fibrous pillow has a cross-sectional base measured at the first elevation and a cross-sectional perimeter, wherein a ratio of the cross-sectional perimeter to the cross-sectional base is greater than 4/1. A laminated fibrous structure is also disclosed, comprising at least one fibrous sheet having a plurality of fibrous cantilever portions. A process for making the fibrous structure comprises the steps of providing a plurality of fibers disposed on a deflection member comprising a patterned framework having a backside and a web-side opposite thereto and a deflection conduits portions, including a plurality of suspended portions elevated from a plane formed by the backside to form void spaces therebetween; and deflecting a portion of the fibers into the deflection conduits such as to cause some of the deflected fibers to be disposed within said void spaces, thereby forming the fibrous domes and the cantilever portions laterally extending therefrom.

Description

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 發明範疇 本發明係有關於製造強韌、柔軟、吸收性纖維織物如紙 匹之方法。更特定言之,本發明係有關於結構纖維織物、 用於製造此種結構纖維織物之裝置及其製法。 發明背景 由纖維織物製成之製品有各式各樣的用途。例如,紙 巾、面紙、衛生紙、餐巾及類似物係現代工業化社會無所 不用的。此種紙製品之大需求量已產生對製品改良樣式的 需求。若紙製品如紙巾、面紙、餐巾、衛生紙、拖把頭及 類似物欲實現其預定任務及欲獲得廣大接受,彼等必需擁 有某些物理特徵。 這些特徵當中更重要的是強度、柔軟度及吸收性。強度 是紙匹在使用時保持其物理完整性的能力。柔軟度係消費 者使用紙於預定用途時感覺到的愉快觸感。吸收性係讓紙 <取及保留流體--特別是水及水溶液及懸浮液--之紙之特 徵。重要的不僅是一定量的紙保住流體的絕對量,而且是 紙吸收流體的速度。 包含補強元件及樹脂框構之通風乾燥造紙帶及/或利用這 些帶製成之纖維織物已爲吾人所知並已説明於以下概括讓 與之美國專利,其揭示内容均併於此以供參考:第 4,514,345 號(1985 年4月30日頒予1〇11115〇11等人);4,528,239 號(1985 年 7 月 9 日頒予 Trokhan) ; 4,529,480 號(1985 年 7 月 16 曰頒予 Trokhan) ; 4,637,859 號( 1987 年 1 月 20 曰頒予 Trokhan) ; 5,098,522 號(1992 年3 月 24 日頒予 Smurkoski 等 -4- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7__ 五、發明説明(2 ) 人);5,245,025 號(1993 年 9 月 1 4 曰頒予 Trokhan 等人); 5,260,171 號( 1993 年 11 月 9 日頒予 Smurkoski 等人); 5,275,700 號(1994 年 1 月 4 曰頒予 Trokhan) ; 5,328,565 號 ( 1994 年 7 月 12 日頒予 Rasch 等人);5,334,289 號( 1994 年 8 月2日頒予Trokhan等人);5,431,786號( 1995年7月1 1日頒 予 Rasch 等人);5,496,624 號(1996 年 3 月 5 日頒予 Stelljes 二 世等人);5,500,277號(1996年3月1 9曰頒予Trokhan等 人),· 5,514,523 號(1996 年 5 月 7 日頒予 Trokhan 等人); 5,527,428 號(1996 年6月18日頒予1'1*〇]^311等人);5,554,467 號( 1996 年9 月 10 日頒予Trokhan等人);5,566,724 號(1996 年10月22日頒予Trokhan等人);5,624,790號(1997年4月 29日頒予Trokhan等人);5,628,876號( 1997年5月13日頒予 Ayers 等人);5,679,222 號(1997 年 1 0 月 2 1 日頒予 Rasch 等 人);5,714,041號( 1998年2月3日頒予Ayers等人); 5,900,122 號(1999 年 5 月 4 日頒予 Huston);及 5,948,210 號 (1999年9月7日頒予Huston)。 在前述先前技藝帶中,樹脂框構係接合於可透液體之補 強元件(如,編織結構或氈)。樹脂框構可爲連續、半連 續、包含眾多獨立之突出物或其任何組合。樹脂框構係自 補強元件向外延伸而形成帶之紙匹面(即,在造紙過程中紙 匹面配置於其上的表面)、與紙匹面相反之背面及在其中間 延伸的偏向導管。偏向導管提供造紙纖維在造紙過程中施 加之廢力差下偏向進入的空間。由於這種特性,此種造紙 帶在本技藝又稱爲”偏向構件”(deflection member)。”造紙 -5- 本紙浪尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ___B7 五、發明説明(3 ) 帶"及••偏向構件,,二詞在此可交換使用。 以上專利所揭示在此種偏向構件上製成之紙,其特徵爲 一般具有至少二個實體上不同之區域:具有第一高度且一 般具有相對高密度之區域及自第一區域延伸至第二高度且 一般具有相對低密度之區域。第一區域一般係由尚未偏向 *進入偏向導管之纖維所形成,而第二區域一般係由已偏向 進入偏向構件之偏向導管之纖維所形成。利用具有連續樹 脂框構及其整體分散眾多獨立偏向導管之帶製成之紙,包 含連續高密度網絡區域及分散於整圖網絡區域中、被網絡 區域分開並自網絡區域延伸之眾多獨立低密度枕狀物(或圓 頂狀物)。連續高密度網絡區域主要是爲提供強度而設計, 而眾多低密度枕狀物主要是爲提供柔軟度及吸收性而設 計。此等帶已用於製造市售成功製品如Bounty®紙巾、 Charmin®衛生紙及charmin Ultra®衛生紙,全部由本受讓 人製售。 一般而言,纖維結構吸收性之某些方面端視其表面積而 足。亦即,就一定纖維紙匹(包括纖維組成、單位重量等等) 而言’紙匹表面積愈大,紙匹吸收性愈高。在結構紙匹 中’分散於整個紙匹中的低密度枕狀物會增加紙匹之表面 積’因而提高紙匹之吸收性。然而,藉由提高包含相對低 密度枕狀物來增加紙匹表面積將造成包含賦予強度之相當 高密度網絡區域之紙匹面積降低。亦即,提高包含枕狀物 之區域與包含網絡之區域之比將對紙之強度有負面影響, 因爲與網絡區域相比,枕狀物具有相對低的固有強度。因 -6- 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公爱) 559632 A7 Γ_______ Β7 五、發明説明(4 ) 此,非常有需要將主要提供強度之高密度網絡區域之表面 積與提供柔軟度及吸收性之低密度區域之表面積之間的失 衡減至最少。 現在,已發現高密度區域與低密度區域之面積可在纖維 結構中有效脱鉤,例如,纖維結構之表面積可提高而不犧 牲纖維結構之強度。明確言之,已發現,利用本發明偏向 構件形成新穎纖維結構即可有效提高相對低密度及吸收性 枕狀物之表面積,而不降低相對高密度網絡之面積。 因此,本發明提供一種新穎強韌、柔軟及吸收性纖維結 構及一種製造此種纖維結構之方法。更明確言之,本發明 提供一種具有至少二區域之纖維結構:具有第一高度之第 一區域及自第一區域延伸以界定第二高度之第二區域,第 二區域具有增進纖維結構吸收性質之增加表面積。 本發明進一步提供一種纖維結構,其中第一區域包含纖 維圓頂狀物及自圓頂狀物橫向延伸之纖維懸臂部份。纖維 懸臂部份增加第二區域之表面積並在某些具體例中形成包 含纖維懸臂部份與第一區域之間實質空隙空間之袋。這些 袋可接納液體而因此進一步提高纖維結構之吸收性。 本發明又提供可用於製造此等結構纖維結構之新穎偏向 構件。更明確言之,本發明提供包含圖案框構之偏向構 件,該偏向構件具有形成空隙之懸吊部份,纖維可在本發 明纖維結構製造過程中偏向進入該空隙以形成纖維懸臂部 份。 本發明進一步提供製造此等偏向構件之方法。在一具體559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Scope of the invention The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a strong, soft and absorbent fibrous fabric such as paper. More specifically, the present invention relates to a structural fiber fabric for use in manufacturing such Device for manufacturing fiber fabrics and method for making the same. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Products made from fiber fabrics have a wide variety of uses. For example, paper towels, facial tissues, toilet paper, napkins and the like are indispensable in modern industrial society. The large demand for paper products has created a demand for improved styles of the products. If paper products such as paper towels, tissues, napkins, toilet paper, mop heads, and the like are to fulfill their intended tasks and gain widespread acceptance, they must possess certain physical Features. More important of these features are strength, softness, and absorbency. Strength is the ability of paper to maintain its physical integrity during use. Softness is the pleasant touch that consumers feel when using paper for their intended purpose. Absorptivity is the characteristic of paper that allows paper < acquisition and retention of fluids-especially water and aqueous solutions and suspensions. What is important is not only certain The amount of paper keeps the absolute amount of fluid, and it is the rate at which the paper absorbs the fluid. Ventilated and dry papermaking belts containing reinforcing elements and resin frames and / or fiber fabrics made from these belts are known to me and have been explained below The U.S. patents generally assigned, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference: No. 4,514,345 (issued on April 30, 1985 to 1011115〇11 and others); No. 4,528,239 (issued on July 9, 1985 Trokhan); No. 4,529,480 (Issued to Trokhan on July 16, 1985); No. 4,637,859 (Issued to Trokhan on January 20, 1987); No. 5,098,522 (Issued to Smurkoski et al. On March 24, 1992. 4-paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7__ V. Description of invention (2) persons; No. 5,245,025 (issued to Trokhan et al. On September 14, 1993); No. 5,260,171 (Awarded to Smurkoski et al. On November 9, 1993); No. 5,275,700 (Awarded to Trokhan on January 4, 1994); No. 5,328,565 (Awarded to Rasch et al. On July 12, 1994); No. 5,334,289 (August 1994) Awarded to Trokh on 2nd an, etc.); 5,431,786 (issued to Rasch et al., July 11, 1995); 5,496,624 (issued to Stelljes II, et al., March 5, 1996); 5,500,277 (March 1, 1996 9th to Trokhan and others), 5,514,523 (to Trokhan and others on May 7, 1996); 5,527,428 (to 1'1 * 〇] ^ 311 and others on June 18, 1996; 5,554,467 No. (issued to Trokhan et al. On September 10, 1996); No. 5,566,724 (to Trokhan et al. On October 22, 1996); No. 5,624,790 (to Trokhan et al. On April 29, 1997); No. 5,628,876 ( Awarded to Ayers et al. On May 13, 1997; No. 5,679,222 (to Rasch et al. On October 21, 1997); No. 5,714,041 (to Ayers et al. On February 3, 1998); 5,900,122 (Issued to Huston on May 4, 1999); and 5,948,210 (issued to Huston on September 7, 1999). In the aforementioned prior art tape, the resin frame was joined to a liquid-permeable reinforcing element (such as a woven structure or felt). The resin frame can be continuous, semi-continuous, containing numerous independent protrusions, or any combination thereof. The resin frame structure extends outward from the reinforcing element to form the paper surface of the belt (that is, the surface on which the paper surface is arranged during the papermaking process), the back surface opposite to the paper surface, and the deflection duct extending in the middle thereof. . The deflection duct provides a space where the papermaking fibers are deflected into by the waste force difference applied during the papermaking process. Because of this characteristic, this type of papermaking belt is also known in the art as a "deflection member". "Papermaking-5- This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (3) Belt " and •• biased components, the terms are interchangeable here The paper disclosed on such a biasing member disclosed in the above patents is generally characterized by having at least two physically different regions: a region having a first height and generally having a relatively high density and extending from the first region to The second height generally has a relatively low density area. The first area is generally formed by fibers that have not been deflected * into the deflection duct, and the second area is generally formed by fibers that have deflected the deflection duct into the deflection member. Utilization Paper with a continuous resin frame structure and its overall dispersion of many independently biased duct tapes, including a continuous high-density network area and a plurality of independent low-density pillows dispersed in the entire network area, separated by the network area, and extending from the network area (Or dome). Continuous high-density network areas are mainly designed to provide strength, while many low-density pillows are mainly used to improve Designed for softness and absorbency. These tapes have been used to make commercially successful products such as Bounty® paper towels, Charmin® toilet paper and charmin Ultra® toilet paper, all manufactured and sold by the assignee. In general, the absorbency of the fibrous structure is Some aspects are sufficient depending on its surface area. That is, for a certain fiber paper (including fiber composition, unit weight, etc.) 'the larger the surface area of the paper, the higher the absorbency of the paper. In the structured paper' Low-density pillows dispersed throughout the paper will increase the surface area of the paper, thereby increasing the absorbency of the paper. However, increasing the surface area of the paper by increasing the inclusion of relatively low-density pillows will result in The paper area of the relatively high-density network area is reduced. That is, increasing the ratio of the area containing the pillow to the area containing the network will have a negative effect on the strength of the paper, because the pillow has a relatively low Inherent strength. Because -6- this paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 public love) 559632 A7 Γ _______ Β7 5. Description of the invention (4) There is a need to minimize the imbalance between the surface area of high density network areas that primarily provide strength and the surface area of low density areas that provide softness and absorbency. It has now been found that the areas of high density areas and low density areas can Effective decoupling in the structure, for example, the surface area of the fibrous structure can be increased without sacrificing the strength of the fibrous structure. Specifically, it has been found that the use of the biasing member of the present invention to form a novel fibrous structure can effectively improve the relatively low density and absorbent pillow shape Surface area of the material without reducing the area of the relatively high density network. Therefore, the present invention provides a novel strong, soft and absorbent fibrous structure and a method for manufacturing such a fibrous structure. More specifically, the present invention provides a Fibrous structure of at least two regions: a first region having a first height and a second region extending from the first region to define a second height. The second region has an increased surface area that enhances the absorption properties of the fibrous structure. The present invention further provides a fiber structure, wherein the first region includes a fiber dome and a fiber cantilever portion extending laterally from the dome. The fiber cantilever portion increases the surface area of the second region and in some embodiments forms a bag containing a substantial void space between the fiber cantilever portion and the first region. These bags accept liquids and thus further increase the absorbency of the fibrous structure. The present invention further provides novel biasing members that can be used to make such structural fiber structures. More specifically, the present invention provides a biasing member including a patterned frame structure, the biasing member having a suspended portion forming a void, and the fiber can be biased into the void to form a fiber cantilever portion during the manufacturing process of the fiber structure of the present invention. The present invention further provides a method for manufacturing such a biasing member. In a specific

559632 A7 ______ B7五、發明説明(5 ) 例中’此種偏向構件包含由至少二層以面對面關係接合在 起所形成的多層框構。每一層都有偏向導管部份。一層 的偏向導管部份爲可透流體且經固定,使得該層之部份對 應於另一層的偏向導管而因此包含眾多的懸吊部份。 在另一具體例中,此種偏向構件包含單層框構,其中懸 吊邵份係由可硬化材料層透過本發明包含差別不透明度之 區域之新穎掩模硬化而形成。 在又一具體例中,偏向構件可由可硬化材料塗層透過本 發明包含不透明區域及透明區域及三維度外形之新穎掩模 硬化而形成。 本發明進一步提供可用於可硬化材料如光敏樹脂材料選 擇性硬化之方法中之新穎掩模。此等掩模也可用於製造本 發明之偏向構件。更明確言之,本發明提供一種具有透明 區域及不透明區域之圖案之掩模;該不透明區域包含差別 不透明度。 本發明也提供一種掩模,其中不透明區域包含在至少_ 方向漸次改變之梯度不透明度。本發明進一步提供一種具 有聯合圖案之掩模;該聯合圖案包含透明/不透明區域之圖 案及自掩模之至少一面延伸之突出物之三維度圖案。本發 明也提供製造本發明掩模之方法。發明概述 本發明之偏向構件包含具有紙匹面及與紙匹面相反之背 面之框構。框構可由任何適當材料製成,包括但不限於, 樹脂材料(如光般樹脂)、塑膠、金屬、經金屬浸潰之聚合 _ 裝 訂559632 A7 ______ B7 V. Description of the invention (5) In the example, 'this kind of biasing member includes a multilayer frame formed by joining at least two layers in a face-to-face relationship. Each layer has a deflection duct section. The deflection duct portion of one layer is fluid-permeable and fixed, so that part of the layer corresponds to the deflection duct of the other layer and therefore contains a large number of suspension portions. In another specific example, such a biasing member includes a single-layer frame structure, wherein the suspension component is formed by hardening a layer of a hardenable material through the novel mask of the region of the invention that includes differential opacity. In yet another specific example, the deflection member may be formed by hardening a coating of a hardenable material through the novel mask of the present invention including opaque regions and transparent regions and a three-dimensional shape. The present invention further provides a novel mask which can be used in a method of selective hardening of a hardenable material such as a photosensitive resin material. These masks can also be used for manufacturing the biasing member of the present invention. More specifically, the present invention provides a mask having a pattern of transparent regions and opaque regions; the opaque regions include differential opacity. The present invention also provides a mask in which the opaque area includes a gradient opacity that gradually changes in at least the _ direction. The invention further provides a mask having a joint pattern; the joint pattern includes a pattern of transparent / opaque areas and a three-dimensional pattern of protrusions extending from at least one side of the mask. The invention also provides a method of making a mask of the invention. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The deflection member of the present invention includes a frame structure having a paper surface and a back surface opposite to the paper surface. The frame can be made of any suitable material, including, but not limited to, resin materials (such as light resins), plastics, metals, and metal impregnated polymers. _ Binding

k -8 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7k -8-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7

物等等。框構之背面界定χ 、 ^ ^^ 1疋入γ十面。框構之厚度則在紙匹 面與背面之間垂直於Χ·γ平面之ζ_方向延伸。 ^構包含自X-Υ平面在ζ.方向延伸之眾多基底,及自眾 夕基底橫向延伸之眾多懸吊部份,其中懸吊部份自χ_γ平 面在Ζ·方向升高以形成m面與懸吊部份間的空陳空 間。雖然懸吊部份本身不必與χ_γ平面平行,但據稱蜗吊 邵份可在實質平行於χ_Υ平面之方向"延伸",以顯示懸吊 部份係自基底"橫向"延伸(亦即,不平行於ζ_方向)。 在一具體例中,框構包含由至少二層形成之多層(層疊) 結構:第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合。每一層都有上 表面及與上表面相反之底表面。每一層可 其包含至少-在Ζ-方向自上表面朝向底表面延==導 管。導管邵份可自上表面延伸通過層之整個厚度至底表 面。第一層之底表面形成框構之背面,而第二層之上表面 則形成框構之紙匹面。在偏向構件之多層具體例(即,包含 眾多層之偏向構件)中,眾多基底係由第一層形成。 根據本發明,在代表性雙層偏向構件(即,包含二層之偏 向構件)中,第二層包含在Ζ·方向自\_丫平面升高之眾多 懸吊部份以在X- γ平面與懸吊部份之間形成空隙空間。在 製造本發明纖維結構之過程中,這些空隙空間可接納眾多 纖維以形成形成中之纖維結構之懸吊部份。 本發明之偏向構件可進一步包含固定於框構指匹面與至 少一部份背面中間的補強元件。補強元件可爲可透流體、 不透流體或部份可透流體(意即補強元件之一些部份可爲可 -9- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4规格(210X 297公嫠) 透况體,而另—却Μ十、 、 則不)。補強元件之實例包括,但不限 、 · τ 耗、師網或其組合。在包含多層偏向構件 之具體例中,k 爾強7L件一般係固定於第一層上表面與至少 一部份第一層启 一 氣表面中間,在此情形時,空隙空間係在補 強元件與第—層之懸吊部份中間形成。 在本,明〈多層偏向構件中,每-層可包含實質連續框 ,實資半連續框構、眾多獨立突出物或其任何組合。在 ^表f生雙層偏向結構中,第_層與第二層之組合之實例包 t不限於,以下:偏向構件,其中第一層包含在其内 既疋第眾夕獨互偏向導管之實質連續圖案網絡,而第二 I含在其内界疋第二眾多獨立偏向導管之實質連續圖案 網絡;偏向構件,纟中第一層包含在其内界定第一眾多獨 乂偏向導管之實質連續圖案網絡,而第二層則包含半連續 圖案網絡;偏命媒/土 ^ _ 夕^ 構件,其中弟一層包含在其内界定第一眾 夕獨乂偏向導管之實質連續圖案網絡,而第二層則包本眾 多獨立突出物;偏向構件,纟中第一層包含 = ::而第二層則包含在其内界定第二眾多獨立偏向導管: 络質連續圖案網絡;偏向構件,纟中第一層包含第 而第-層則包含弟二半連續圖案網絡;偏向 構件,其中弟—層包含半連續圖案網絡,&第二層本 眾多獨立突出物;偏向媸杜 ° ^ 偏向構件,其中第一層包含眾多獨立突 出:’而第二層則包含在其内界定第二眾多獨立偏向導管 :實質連續圖案網,絡;偏向構件,其中第-層包含眾多獨 上突出物’而弟二層則包含半連續圖案網,备;偏向構件, 559632 A7 _ B7 侧(8~) " 其中第一層包含第一眾多獨立突出物,而第二層則包含第 二眾多獨立突出物。 第一層及/或第二層可爲不透流體或部份可透流體。部份 可透流體層之一實例包含具有眾多偏向導管之層,其中至 少一些偏向導管以不透流體材料”封閉”。 一種製造多層偏向構件之方法,包含以下步驟: 形成第一層’其具有上表面及與上表面相反之底表面並界 定X-Y平面;該第一層進一步具有在第一層上表面與底表 面中間延伸的第一導管部份; 形成第二層’其具有上表面、與上表面相反之底表面及在 第二層上與底表面中間延伸之第二導管部份;及 與第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起,使得第一層 之上表面面對第二層之底表面,其中對應於第一層第一導 管部份之第二層之懸吊部份係以距X - Y平面一定距離隔開 以在X-Y平面與第二層懸吊部份中間形成空隙空間。 第一層及第二層中任何一層或二層皆可由包含以下步驟 之方法形成: 提供由成形表面支撑之液體光敏樹脂之塗層,該塗層具有 第一厚度; 提供硬化輻射源; 提供其中具有透明區域及不透明區域之預選圖案之掩模並 將掩模固定在液體光敏樹脂之塗層與硬化輻射源中間,俾 掩模之不透明區域遮蔽塗層之一些區域使其不被硬化輻射 照到’而掩模之透明區域則使塗層之其他區域不被掩蔽; -11 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ---------B7 五、發5説明(9 Γ "—' ~'— 將塗層透過掩模曝露於硬化輻射使未遮蔽之塗層區域硬 化,同時讓經遮蔽之塗層區域不硬化,藉以形成半成形 層;自半成形層除去實質全部未硬化之液體光敏樹脂以留 下經固化之樹脂結構。 視需要而足,可提供背膜並將其固定在成形表面與液體 光敏樹脂塗層之中間以保護成形表面不被液體樹脂污染。 或者或另外,對於製造上述各層之方法而言,每一層或 全部二層可由提供具有預定厚度之一層並在其中形成眾多 預定形狀之小孔及根據預選圖案而形成。 若需要具有補強元件之偏向構件,該方法可進一步包括 以下步驟:提供由成形表面支撑之適當補強元件,該補強 疋件具有面向成形表面之下面及與下面相反之上面;及將 液體光敏樹脂塗層沉積於補強元件之上面。 視需要而定,塗層之厚度可藉例如輥、棒、刀或本技藝 已知任何適當裝置加以控制。 在一具體例中,第一及第二層係同時在二個個別成形表 面上形成,然後在壓機鉗口接觸後接合在一起。根據本發 明之一具體例,必需使用將至少第一層之上表面及第二層 之底表面之一保持於部份未硬化情況之步驟始能使第一及 第二層二者在接觸後接合在一起。或者或另外,第一及第 二層可利用黏合材料接合。在一具體例中,第一層之上表 面及/或第二層之底表面包含會引起或促使第一及第二層接 合在一起的化學活性成分。 每一懸吊邵份皆具有紙匹向表面(web-oriented surface), -12- 本紙張尺度適财a S家標準(CNS) A4規格(⑽x297公爱) 559632 A7 _______B7 五、發明説明(1Q~) ---~ -- 其包含框構之紙匹面及與其相反之背表面。懸吊部份與 Y平面中間,或懸吊部份與補強元件中間所形成的空隙空 間,更明確言4,係在懸吊部份之背表面與\_丫平面或補 強元件中間形成。懸吊部份之背表面之眾多形狀及構型皆 涵蓋於本發明内,其全部可利用本發明各種方法之一形 成。懸吊部份可具有實質平行於χ · Y平面之背表面。懸吊 部份也可具有不平行於紙匹向表面之背表面。懸吊部份也 可具有曲線形、圓形、”波浪”形表面,或具有不同不規則 形狀之背表面。 當從垂直於X-Y平面之特別橫切面觀看時,懸吊部份在 橫切面可形成”懸臂,,部份或,,橋"部份。如此處所用,,,懸 臂”懸吊部份係意指在垂直於X· γ平面之橫切面具有至少一 自由端的懸吊部份,而”架橋”懸吊部份則爲在垂直於χ_γ 平面之橫切面連接(或”橋連”)至少二相鄰基底的懸吊部 份。 與上述各層之差別圖案類似,框構之紙匹面及背面可包 含實質連續圖案,實質半連續圖案或由眾多獨立突出物所 形成的圖案。在框構被視爲整體之圖案與被視爲框構之紙 匹面或背面表面的圖案之間的差異是,就框構被視爲整體 而言,框構之整個厚度都爲了框構之連續性、半連續性或 不連續性而被考慮;而就框構之紙匹面及背面而言,唯有 相關之表面爲了該相關表面之連續性、半連續性或不連續 性而被考慮。 被視爲整體的框構,不論是多層或單層,皆可具有自框 -13- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準:iCNS) A4规格(210 X 297公釐) 裝 訂Things and so on. The back of the frame defines χ, ^ ^^ 1 and enters γ. The thickness of the frame structure extends between the paper surface and the back surface perpendicular to the ζ_ direction of the X · γ plane. The structure includes a plurality of bases extending from the X-Υ plane in the ζ. Direction, and a plurality of hanging parts extending laterally from the Zhongxi base, wherein the hanging parts are raised from the χ_γ plane in the Z · direction to form the m-plane and Empty space between the hanging parts. Although the hanging part itself does not have to be parallel to the χ_γ plane, it is said that the snail hanging part can be "extended" in a direction substantially parallel to the χ_Υ plane to show that the hanging part is extended from the base "transversely" ( That is, not parallel to the z_ direction). In a specific example, the frame structure includes a multilayer (laminated) structure formed by at least two layers: the first layer and the second layer are joined in a face-to-face relationship. Each layer has an upper surface and a bottom surface opposite the upper surface. Each layer may include a duct extending from the upper surface toward the bottom surface at least in the Z-direction. The catheter component can extend from the upper surface through the entire thickness of the layer to the bottom surface. The bottom surface of the first layer forms the back of the frame, and the upper surface of the second layer forms the paper surface of the frame. In the multi-layer concrete example of the biasing member (i.e., the biasing member including a plurality of layers), many substrates are formed by the first layer. According to the present invention, in a representative two-layer deflection member (ie, a deflection member including two layers), the second layer includes a plurality of suspended portions that rise in the Z · direction from the \ _- Y plane to be in the X-γ plane. A void space is formed between the suspension part and the suspension part. During the manufacturing of the fibrous structure of the present invention, these void spaces can receive a large number of fibers to form a suspended portion of the fibrous structure being formed. The deflection member of the present invention may further include a reinforcing element fixed between the frame finger surface and at least a part of the back surface. The reinforcing element can be permeable, impermeable or partially permeable (meaning that some parts of the reinforcing element can be -9- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 cm)) Through the situation body, and the other-but M X,, but not). Examples of reinforcing elements include, but are not limited to, τ loss, division network, or a combination thereof. In a specific example including a multilayer deflection member, the kerqiang 7L piece is generally fixed between the upper surface of the first layer and at least a part of the first layer of the air surface. In this case, the void space is between the reinforcing element and the first component. -Formed in the middle of the hanging part of the floor. In this paper, "multi-layered biasing members, each-layer may contain a substantially continuous frame, a semi-continuous frame of actual funding, a number of independent protrusions, or any combination thereof. In the bilayer bidirectional bias structure, the example of the combination of the first layer and the second layer is not limited to the following: a biasing member, in which the first layer includes the first and second mutual bias tubes. Substantially continuous pattern network, and the second I contains in its inner boundary a substantial continuous pattern network of the second plurality of independent biased ducts; the biasing member, the first layer contains the substantially continuous definition of the first plurality of uniquely biased ducts within it Pattern network, while the second layer contains a semi-continuous pattern network; a biased medium / earth ^ _ ^ ^ component, where the first layer contains a substantially continuous pattern network that defines the first Zhongxi independent biased duct, and the second layer The layer contains many independent protrusions; the biased component, the first layer contains = ::, and the second layer contains the second plurality of independent biased conduits defined therein: a continuous network of patterns; the biased component, the first One layer contains the first and the first layer contains the two-semi-continuous pattern network; the biased component, where the second-layer contains the semi-continuous pattern network, & the second layer has many independent protrusions; The first layer contains numerous independent protrusions: 'while the second layer contains the second plurality of independent biasing ducts defined therein: a substantially continuous pattern net, a network; a biasing member, in which the first layer contains a plurality of unique protrusions' The layer contains a semi-continuous pattern net, and the biasing member, 559632 A7 _ B7 side (8 ~) " Among them, the first layer contains the first plurality of independent protrusions, and the second layer contains the second plurality of independent protrusions. The first layer and / or the second layer may be fluid-impermeable or partially fluid-permeable. An example of a partially fluid-permeable layer includes a layer having a plurality of deflection ducts, at least some of which are "closed" with a fluid-impermeable material. A method for manufacturing a multilayer biasing member, comprising the following steps: forming a first layer having an upper surface and a bottom surface opposite to the upper surface and defining an XY plane; the first layer further has a middle between the upper surface and the bottom surface of the first layer A first duct portion extending; forming a second layer having an upper surface, a bottom surface opposite to the upper surface, and a second duct portion extending between the second layer and the bottom surface; and the first layer and the first layer The two layers are joined together in a face-to-face relationship so that the upper surface of the first layer faces the bottom surface of the second layer, and the suspension portion of the second layer corresponding to the first duct portion of the first layer is spaced from X- The Y plane is separated by a certain distance to form a void space between the XY plane and the suspended portion of the second layer. Any one or both of the first layer and the second layer may be formed by a method including the steps of: providing a coating of a liquid photosensitive resin supported by a forming surface, the coating having a first thickness; providing a hardened radiation source; providing therein A mask with a preselected pattern of transparent and opaque areas and the mask is fixed between the coating of the liquid photosensitive resin and the hardened radiation source, and the opaque area of the mask masks some areas of the coating from being hardened by hardened radiation 'The transparent area of the mask keeps the other areas of the coating from being masked; -11-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 -------- -B7 Five and five instructions (9 Γ " — '~' — Expose the coating to hardening radiation through a mask to harden the unshielded coating area, while leaving the shielded coating area unhardened to form a half Forming layer; removing substantially all of the uncured liquid photosensitive resin from the semi-formed layer to leave a cured resin structure. If necessary, a back film can be provided and fixed on the forming surface and the liquid photosensitive resin coating In order to protect the forming surface from being contaminated with liquid resin, or alternatively, for the method of manufacturing the above-mentioned layers, each or all of the two layers may be provided with a layer having a predetermined thickness and forming a plurality of small holes in a predetermined shape and according to a preselection If a biasing member having a reinforcing element is required, the method may further include the steps of providing an appropriate reinforcing element supported by the forming surface, the reinforcing member having a lower surface facing the forming surface and an upper surface opposite to the lower surface; and A liquid photosensitive resin coating is deposited on the reinforcing element. The thickness of the coating can be controlled by, for example, a roller, rod, knife, or any suitable device known in the art. In a specific example, the first and the second The two-layer system is formed on two separate forming surfaces at the same time, and then joined together after the press jaws contact. According to a specific example of the present invention, it is necessary to use at least the upper surface of the first layer and the bottom surface of the second layer. One of the steps of maintaining a partially uncured condition allows the first and second layers to join together after contact. Alternatively or in addition, the first and second layers may be bonded using an adhesive material. In a specific example, the upper surface of the first layer and / or the bottom surface of the second layer may cause the first and second layers to be bonded to each other. Chemically active ingredients together. Each hanging part has a web-oriented surface, -12- This paper is a standard of the standard (CNS) A4 specifications (⑽x297 public love) 559632 A7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention (1Q ~) --- ~-It includes the frame paper surface and the opposite back surface. It is formed between the hanging part and the Y plane, or between the hanging part and the reinforcing element. The interstitial space, more specifically 4, is formed between the back surface of the suspension part and the plane of __ or the reinforcing element. Many shapes and configurations of the back surface of the hanging part are covered by the present invention, and all of them can be formed by one of various methods of the present invention. The suspended portion may have a back surface substantially parallel to the χ · Y plane. The hanging portion may also have a back surface that is not parallel to the paper facing surface. The suspension can also have a curved, round, "wavy" surface, or a back surface with a different irregular shape. When viewed from a special cross-section perpendicular to the XY plane, the suspension portion can form a "cantilever," or "bridge" portion on the cross-section. As used herein, the "cantilever" suspension portion is It means that the suspension part with at least one free end is in the cross section perpendicular to the X · γ plane, and the "bridge" suspension part is connected (or "bridged") at least two in the cross section perpendicular to the χ_γ plane. Suspended portion of adjacent base. Similar to the different patterns of the above layers, the paper surface and back of the frame can include substantially continuous patterns, substantially semi-continuous patterns, or patterns formed by a number of independent protrusions. The difference between the pattern of the frame as a whole and the pattern of the paper surface or the back surface that is regarded as the frame is that, as far as the frame is considered as a whole, the entire thickness of the frame is for the frame Continuity, semi-continuity, or discontinuity is considered; and for the paper surface and back of the frame, only the relevant surface is considered for the continuity, semi-continuity or discontinuity of the relevant surface . The frame structure considered as a whole, whether it is multi-layer or single-layer, can have a self-frame -13- This paper size applies Chinese national standard: iCNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) binding

559632 A7 B7_ 五、發明説明(11 ) 構紙匹面延伸至背面的可透液體導管部份。在一具體例 中,至少框構之紙匹面與背面之一包含眾多獨立開孔分散 於其中的實質連續圖案,其中眾多獨立開孔包含眾多獨立 偏向導管。紙匹面或背面之一些眾多開孔’若有需要,可 用不透流體材料封閉以形成框構之不透流體部份。 製造偏向構件或其單層之方法之具體例,包含以下步 驟: 提供由形成表面支撑之液體光敏樹脂塗層,該塗層具有上 表面、與其相反並面向成形表面之底表面及上表面與底表 面中間所界定之預選第一厚度; 提供硬化輻射源; 提供具有透明區域及不透明區域之掩模,不透明區域包含 至少第一不透明區域及第二不透明區域,第一不透明區域 具有第一不透明度而第二不透明區域則具有較第一不透明 度爲低之第二不透明度; 將掩模固定於塗層與硬化輻射源中間; 透過掩模將液體光敏樹脂硬化,其中第一不透明區域遮蔽 塗層第一區域使其不被硬化輻射照到以防止塗層第一區域 硬化至塗層之第一厚度,第二不透明區域則部份遮蔽塗層 第二區域以容許硬化輻射使塗層第二區域硬化至小於塗層 第一厚度之預定第二厚度,而透明區域則使塗層第三區域 未被遮蔽以容許硬化輻射透過第一厚度使第三區域硬化, 因而形成半形成偏向構件;及 自半成形偏向構件移除實質全部未硬化之液體光敏樹脂以 -14- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公f) 559632559632 A7 B7_ V. Description of the invention (11) The structure of the paper is extended to the back of the liquid-permeable duct. In a specific example, at least one of the paper surface and the back surface of the frame includes a substantially continuous pattern in which a plurality of independent openings are dispersed, and the plurality of independent openings include a plurality of independent deflection ducts. A number of openings on the surface or back of the paper sheet, if necessary, may be closed with a fluid-impermeable material to form a fluid-impermeable portion of the frame. A specific example of a method for manufacturing a biasing member or a single layer thereof includes the following steps: providing a liquid photosensitive resin coating supported by a forming surface, the coating having an upper surface, a bottom surface opposite to the bottom surface, and a top surface and a bottom surface; A preselected first thickness defined in the middle of the surface; providing a hardened radiation source; providing a mask having a transparent area and an opaque area, the opaque area including at least a first opaque area and a second opaque area, the first opaque area having a first opacity and The second opaque area has a second opacity that is lower than the first opacity; the mask is fixed between the coating and the hardening radiation source; the liquid photosensitive resin is hardened through the mask, wherein the first opaque area shields the coating An area is protected from hardening radiation to prevent the first area of the coating from hardening to a first thickness of the coating, and a second opaque area partially shields the second area of the coating to allow the hardening radiation to harden the second area of the coating To a predetermined second thickness less than the first thickness of the coating, while the transparent area leaves the third area of the coating uncovered To allow the hardening radiation to pass through the first thickness to harden the third region, thereby forming a semi-formed deflection member; and removing substantially all of the uncured liquid photosensitive resin from the semi-formed deflection member to -14- this paper scale applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 male f) 559632

召下經硬化t纖維結構,其形成具有自塗層之上表面形成 之紙匹面及自塗層之底表面形成並界定χ·γ平面之巨大單 平面圖案框構。 所得框構包含自塗層第三區域形成之眾多基底及自塗層 第一區域形成之眾多懸吊部份,其中懸吊部份係自眾多基 底橫向延伸且與X · γ平面隔開以在χ _ γ平面與懸吊部份中 間形成空隙空間。 本發明之纖維結構包含至少二區域··界定第一平面且具 第一鬲度之第一眾多微區域(或簡稱第一區域)及自第一平 面向外延伸以界定第二高度之第二眾多微區域(或簡稱第二 區域),其中至少一些第二眾多微區域包含纖維圓頂狀物及 自圓頂狀物橫向在第二高度延伸之纖維懸臂部份。如此處 所用’纖維圓頂狀物及自其延伸懸吊部份包含”枕狀物,,。 然而,應注意的是,一些枕狀物可不具有懸吊部份。 每一第一及第二眾多微區域可爲實質連續、實質半連 續、由眾多獨JL突出物形成或包含其組合。若第一眾多微 區域包含實質連續及巨大單平面網絡區域,則第二眾多微 區域可包含分散於整個網絡區域中之眾多獨立枕狀物,至 少一些枕狀物包含自網絡區域延伸之纖維圓頂狀物及自圓 頂狀物橫向延伸之纖維懸臂部份。 一些纖維懸臂部份自第一平面升高而形成袋,其包含在 第一平面與纖維懸臂部份中間之實質空隙空間。這些袋咸 信可在纖維結構使用時提供接納液體之額外空間而因此增 強其吸收性質。纖維結構之纖維懸臂部份也可增加其總表 -15- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 __B7 五、發明説明(13 ) 面積,因而進一步有助於提高纖維結構之吸收性質。在垂 直於X-Y平面之橫切面中,構成纖維懸臂部份之至少一枕 狀物之總橫切面周圍與該枕狀物之橫切面基底之比爲4/1 或更大。 有些枕狀物,不論彼等包含連續圖案、半連續圖案或獨 立突出物之圖案,可不在垂直於X-Y平面之橫切面具有明 確纖維懸臂部份。但既使無纖維懸臂部份,本發明之纖維 結構也提供第二眾多微區域表面積增加之益處。因此,在 另一方面,本發明之纖維結構包含界定第一平面且具第一 南度之第一眾多微區域’及自第一平面向外延伸以形成第 二高度之第二眾多微區域,其中在垂直於第一平面之至少 一橫切面中,第二眾多微區域包含具有在第一高度測量之 橫切面周圍及橫切面基底之枕狀物,其中橫切面周圍與橫 切面基底之比爲4/1或更大。 纖維結構之差別區域可具有差別單位重量及/或差別密度 及/或差別組成。在一具體例中,第一眾多微區域之密度係 大於第二眾多微區域之密度。在另一具體例中,第二眾多 微區域之單位重量係大於第一眾多微區域之單位重量。在 又一具體例中,長纖維之量與短纖維之量之比可變化,以 使得此比爲1. 〇、大於1 · 〇或小於1 0。本發明之纖維結構可 具有在第一眾多微區域之高密度與第二眾多微區域之低密 度中間的密度。纖維懸臂部份可具有此種中間密度。 本發明之層疊結構可包含至少二疊片。至少一疊片包含 上述纖維結構。在一具體例中,本發明之層疊結構包含至 -16 - 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇x 297公釐) 559632 A7 _____ B7_ 立、發明説明(14 ) 少第一叠片與第二疊片接合在一起。第一疊片包含纖維薄 片’其具有至少二區域及包含界定第一平面且具有第一高 度之第一眾多微區域,及包含自第一平面向外延伸以界定 第二高度之眾多纖維圓頂狀物及自圓頂狀物在第二高度橫 向延伸之眾多纖維懸臂部份之第二眾多微區域。層疊結構 中另一疊片可具有或不具有懸吊部份。當然,另一疊片可 藉本發明已知之任何方法製造,包括但不限於,通風乾燥 或習知方法。疊片可如此接合,以使得一疊片之纖維懸臂 部份面對另一疊片。或者,具有纖維懸臂部份之疊片可與 具有纖維懸臂部份之相反面接合。 在包含至少二疊片之層疊結構中,每一疊片可具有與第 一平面隔開之纖維懸臂部份以形成構成第一平面與纖維懸 臂部份中間的實質空隙空間之袋。然後,若二疊片接合在 一起使得一疊片之纖維懸臂部份面向另一疊片之纖維懸臂 部份’則一疊片之至少一些纖維懸臂部份可配置在纖維懸 臂部份與另一疊片之第一平面中間所形成的袋中。此種二 疊片之接合咸信可提供疊片在至少一橫向方向有限之相對 和動度’而不撕裂任一疊片或使二叠片分離。此種移動度 咸信可促進本發明層疊纖維結構之柔軟度及吸收性。或 者’疊片可如此接合以使彼等之個別纖維懸臂部份面向相 反方向。 一種製造本發明纖維結構之方法,包含以下步驟: 提供上述本發明之偏向構件; k供眾多纖維並將眾多纖維沉積於偏向構件上; -17- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7The hardened t-fiber structure is formed, which has a huge single-plane pattern frame with a paper surface formed from the upper surface of the coating and a bottom surface formed from the coating and defines the χ · γ plane. The obtained frame structure includes a plurality of substrates formed from the third region of the coating and a plurality of suspended portions formed from the first region of the coating, wherein the suspended portions extend laterally from the plurality of substrates and are separated from the X · γ plane to A void space is formed between the χ _ γ plane and the suspended portion. The fibrous structure of the present invention includes at least two regions. A first plurality of micro-regions (or first regions for short) defining a first plane and having a first degree and a second region extending outward from the first plane to define a second height A plurality of microregions (or second regions for short), at least some of the second plurality of microregions include a fiber dome and a fiber cantilever portion extending laterally at a second height from the dome. As used herein, the 'fiber dome and the hanging portion extending therefrom include a "pillow," however, it should be noted that some pillows may not have a hanging portion. Each of the first and second Numerous micro-regions may be substantially continuous, substantially semi-continuous, formed by a plurality of unique JL protrusions, or include a combination thereof. If the first plurality of micro-regions includes a substantially continuous and huge single-plane network region, the second plurality of micro-regions may include dispersed in There are many independent pillows in the entire network area. At least some of the pillows include a fiber dome extending from the network area and a fiber cantilever portion extending laterally from the dome. Some fiber cantilever portions are from the first plane. Raised to form pockets, which contain a substantial void space between the first plane and the cantilever portion of the fiber. These bags provide additional space for the liquid structure to receive the liquid when in use, thereby enhancing its absorption properties. The fibers of the fiber structure Cantilever part can also increase its general table-15- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 __B7 V. Description of invention (13) Area, thus further helping to improve the absorption properties of the fiber structure. In the cross section perpendicular to the XY plane, around the total cross section of at least one pillow that forms the cantilever portion of the fiber and the base of the cross section of the pillow The ratio is 4/1 or greater. Some pillows, whether they contain continuous patterns, semi-continuous patterns, or independent protrusions, may not have a clear fiber cantilever portion in a cross section perpendicular to the XY plane. But even if Without a cantilever portion, the fibrous structure of the present invention also provides the benefit of increasing the surface area of the second plurality of microdomains. Therefore, in another aspect, the fibrous structure of the present invention includes a first plurality that defines a first plane and has a first south degree. Micro-regions' and a second plurality of micro-regions extending outward from the first plane to form a second height, wherein in at least one cross-section perpendicular to the first plane, the second plurality of micro-regions include Pillows around the cross-section and the base of the cross-section, where the ratio between the cross-section and the base of the cross-section is 4/1 or greater. The difference area of the fiber structure may have a unit of difference Quantity and / or differential density and / or differential composition. In a specific example, the density of the first plurality of micro-regions is greater than the density of the second plurality of micro-regions. In another specific example, the unit weight of the second plurality of micro-regions is It is greater than the unit weight of the first plurality of micro-regions. In yet another specific example, the ratio of the amount of long fibers to the amount of short fibers may be varied such that the ratio is 1.0, greater than 1 · 0, or less than 10. The fiber structure of the present invention may have a density between the high density of the first plurality of micro-regions and the low density of the second plurality of micro-regions. The fiber cantilever portion may have such an intermediate density. The laminated structure of the present invention may include at least two layers Sheet. At least one stack contains the above-mentioned fiber structure. In a specific example, the stack structure of the present invention includes up to -16-this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × x297 mm) 559632 A7 _____ B7_ Li, Description of the invention (14) Less first lamination and second lamination are joined together. The first stack includes a fiber sheet having at least two regions and including a first plurality of micro-regions defining a first plane and having a first height, and a plurality of fiber domes extending outward from the first plane to define a second height And the second plurality of micro-regions of the plurality of fiber cantilever portions extending laterally from the dome at the second height. Another laminated sheet in the laminated structure may or may not have a hanging portion. Of course, another stack can be made by any method known to the present invention, including but not limited to, air-drying or conventional methods. The laminations can be joined such that the cantilever portion of one of the laminations faces the other lamination. Alternatively, the laminate having the fiber cantilever portion may be joined to the opposite side having the fiber cantilever portion. In a laminated structure including at least two laminations, each lamination may have a fiber cantilever portion spaced from the first plane to form a pocket constituting a substantial void space between the first plane and the fiber cantilever portion. Then, if the two laminations are joined together so that the fiber cantilever portion of one lamination faces the fiber cantilever portion of the other lamination, then at least some of the fiber cantilever portions of one lamination can be disposed between the fiber cantilever portion and another In a bag formed in the middle of the first plane of the lamination. Such bonding of the two laminations can provide the laminations with limited relative motion in at least one lateral direction without tearing either lamination or separating the two laminations. Such mobility can promote the softness and absorbency of the laminated fiber structure of the present invention. Alternatively, the laminations can be joined so that their individual fiber cantilever portions face in opposite directions. A method for manufacturing the fiber structure of the present invention includes the following steps: providing the above-mentioned deflection member of the present invention; k for a large number of fibers and depositing a plurality of fibers on the deflection member; -17- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7

=多纖維之-部份偏轉進人偏向構件之偏向導管中以引 ί-些偏向纖維或其部份沉積於偏向構件之X.Y平面血縣 構:及 門精以形成半成形纖維結 形纖維結構自偏向構件分離,藉以形成本發明之纖 2法可進-步包含將其上具有半成形纖維結構之 姓#、 丞供罐表面上,精以使半成形纖維 、〜構 < 一部份密實化之步驟。 使眾多纖維之-部份偏向之步驟可包含施加機械壓力於 邵份之纖維或流體壓力差如眞空壓力於眾多纖維。在一具 禮例中,配置於偏向構件之紙匹可以可挽材料片覆蓋,以 使得紙匹配置於可撓材料片與偏向構件中間。可撓材料片 之透氣性小於偏向構件之透氣性。施加流體壓力差於材料 片可引起至少一部份之材料片偏向造紙帶及至少一部份之 紙匹偏向進入造紙帶之導管中。 眾多纖維可自本技藝已知之任何纖維選出,例如,纖維 素纖維、合成纖維或其任何組合。眾多纖維也可以濕潤纖 維紙匹之形成供應,其中紙匹之一部份可有效地偏轉進入 偏向導管中及偏向構件之懸吊部份與x _ γ平面中間所形成 之空隙空間中。 本發明也提供用於可硬化材料硬化方法中的掩模,如適 合於製造本發明偏向構件之光敏樹脂材料。在一具體例 中,本發明之掩模包含具有上面及與上面相反之底面,及 -18 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 _ B7 ^_______ 五、發明説明(16 ) 透明與不透明區域之圖案之結構,其中不透明區域包含具 有第一不透明度之至少第一不透明區域及具有不同於第一 不透明度之第二不透明度之至少第二不透明區域。 透明與不透明區域可包含非無規及重複圖案。不透明區 域可包含實質連續圖案、實質半連續圖案、由眾多獨立區 域所形成之圖案或其任何組合。再者,第一不透明區域及 第二不透明區域可包含非無規及重複圖案。第一不透明區 域、第二不透明區域或第一及第二不透明區域兩者都可包 含實質連續圖案、實質半連續圖案、由眾多獨立區域所形 成之圖案或其任何組合。第二不透明區域可鄰近或離開第 一不透明區域。 不透明區域可包含二種以上差別不透明度。例如,根據 本發明之掩模可包含具有在第一不透明度與第二不透明度 中間的第三不透明度之第三不透明區域。 在一具體例中,不透明區域包含在至少一方向漸次變化 之梯度不透明度。梯度不透明度之區域可包含第一不透明 區域、第二不透明區域或與彼等分開。梯度不透明度可以 等增量或者以不等增量在一或若干方向變化。 在另一具體例中,掩模包含三維度外形,如自掩模之至 少一面延伸之突出物之圖案。自掩模之底面延伸之突出物 可作成具有可壓印於可硬化材料塗層以在塗層形成對應凹 痕或空隙之構造及構型。自掩模之上面延伸之突出物可作 .成可提供空隙之構造及構型,液體可硬化材料可流入空隙 中以近似掩模外形之輪廓。任一或二突出物圖案可包含實 -19- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(17 ) 質連續圖案、實質半連續圖案、由眾多獨立區域所形成之 圖案或其任何組合。任一或二突出物圖案可和透明區域及 不透明區域相連合以形成合併非無規及重複圖案。在一此 種具體例中,不透明區域包含突出物之遠端表面。 在掩模之一具體例中,透明區域及不透明區域之圖案係 各自獨三並可與突出物之圖案分開。此種掩模可包含由至 少第一元件及與其面對面關係並置之第二元件所形成之複 合結構,其中第一元件形成透明及不透明區域之圖案而第 二元件則形成突出物之圖案。在此種複合掩模中之第一及 第二元件可叠置而形成不透明區域及突出物之合併非無規 及重複圖案。 具差別不透明度之掩模可用於使可硬化材料硬化之方法 中以建構本發明之偏向構件。例如,當包含第一及第二不 透明度之掩模固定在硬化輻射源與可硬化材料塗層之中間 以選擇地遮蔽塗層免被硬化輻射照到時,具有第一不透明 度之第一不透明區域遮蔽塗層之第一區域免被硬化輻射照 到以使第一區域在塗層之整個厚度保持不硬化,具有第二 不透明度之第二不透明區域則部份遮蔽塗層之第二區域以 容許硬化輻射使塗層硬化至小於塗層整個厚度之部份厚 度,而透明區域則留下塗層之第三區域未被遮蔽以容許硬 化輻射使可硬化材料硬化至其整個厚度。 若使用具有梯度不透明度之掩模於塗層硬化,則具有梯 度不透明度之區域即遮蔽塗層之對應區域免被硬化輻射照 到,以引起該對應區域硬化至與掩模漸次不透明區域之漸 -20- 本紙浪尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4规格(210X297公釐) 559632 A7 _ B7 五、發明説明(18 ) 次變化不透明度相關連的漸次變化厚度。例如,若梯度不 透明度以等增量或減量在一方向改變(增加或減少),塗層 對應區域之硬化深度亦將以等減量或增量漸次改變。當 然,梯度不透明度可以不等增量改變。 本發明之掩模可由包含以下步驟之方法製造:提供實質 均勻厚度之薄透明材料;根據第一預定圖案在該材料上形 成不透明區域之圖案;及根據第二預定圖案浮花壓製該材 料。該方法可建構成使第一預定圖案與第二預定圖案實質 相連合以形成合併無規重複圖案。例如,形成不透明區域 及浮花壓製該材料之步驟可同時進行。形成不透明區域之 圖案之步驟可包含將油墨施加至薄透明材料之選擇區域。 選擇區域可包含材料浮花壓製區域之遠端表面。 具有差別不透明度之區域之掩模可以多步驟方法形成, 包含將透明膜印刷以形成具有特定最初不透明度之不透明 區域之圖案,然後依需要將膜印刷第二(第三、第四、等等) 次以形成具有不同於最初不透明度(或相互不同)之另一透 明度之不透明區域之圖案。差別不透明度也可以一步骤印 刷形成,如藉包含具有差別深度以接受油墨之圖案之照相 凹版印刷輥。印刷時自照相凹版印刷輥轉移至透明膜之油 墨將具有差別強度一反映輥圖案之差別深度一之區域。形 成不透明區域之其他方法也可用於本發明,包括但不限 於,化學、電磁、雷射、熱等等。 在另一方面,一種利用上述三維度掩模製造本發明偏向 構件之方法,包含以下步驟: -21 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ______ B7 五、發明説明(5一)" ' -- 提供由成形表面支撑之液體可硬化材料塗層,該塗層具有 面向成形表面之底表面、與底表面相反之上表面及上與底 表面中間所界定之第一厚度; 提供建構及配置成可發射硬化輻射以使成形表面所支撑之 塗層硬化之硬化輻射源; 提供掩模’其中具有透明區域及不透明區域之第一圖案及 自該掩模之一面向外延伸之突出物之第二圖案; 將掩模固定於塗層與硬化輻射源中間,以使得突出物之第 二圖案至少部份沒入塗層中,藉以在其中形成三維度空 隙; 使可硬化材料硬化,其中第一圖案之不透明區域至少部份 遮蔽塗層之選定區域不被硬化輻射源照到,以使得選定區 域硬化至第一厚度之至少一部份,藉以形成半成形偏向構 件;及 自半成形偏向構件移除幾乎全部未硬化之材料以留下形成 偏向構件之固化樹脂結構;該偏向構件包含具有自塗層上 表面形成之紙匹面及自塗層底表面形成之背面之巨大單平 面圖案框構。 如上所解釋,第一圖案、第二圖案或第一圖案及第二圖 案兩者皆可爲非無規及重複。視掩模之特定具體例而定, 掩模可如此固定以使得突出物之第二圖案沒入掩模第一圖 案之不透明區域至少部份遮蔽之選定區域。或者或另外, 掩模可如此固定以使得突出物之第二圖案沒入不被掩模第 一圖案之不透明區域遮蔽之選定區域。 -22- 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(2〇 ) 在一具體例中,掩模包含由至少薄膜及與其iI之浮花 壓製元件所形成之複合結構;該浮花壓製元件形成突出物 之第二圖案。在此種具體例中,浮花壓製元件、薄膜或浮 花壓製元件及薄膜兩者皆可包含不透明區域。若浮花壓製 元件及薄膜二者皆包含不透明區域,則浮花壓製元件之不 透明區域及薄膜之不透明區域相互協同形成透明及不透明 區域之第一圖案,也許很有利。 浮花壓製元件可對硬化輻射透明。或者,浮花壓製元件 可不透硬化輻射。在一具體例中,浮花壓製元件通體有空 隙。此種浮花壓製元件可包含,例如,但不限於,通體具 有開放區域之编織元件或篩網。 一種利用複合掩模製造偏向構件之方法,可包含以下步 驟: 提供由成形表面支撑之液體可硬化材料塗層,該塗層具有 面向成形表面之底表面、與底表面相反之上表面及上與底 表面中間所界定之第一厚度; 提供建構及配置成可發射硬化輻射以使成形表面所支撑之 塗層硬化之硬化輻射源; 提供浮花壓製元件並將浮花壓製元件與塗層上表面並置, 使得浮花昼製元件至少部份沒入塗層中,因而在塗層中形 成空隙之圖案; 提供薄膜並將薄膜與浮花壓製元件並置,其中浮花壓製元 件與薄膜聯合包含透明區域及不透明區域之圖案,其中不 透明區域遮蔽塗層之-些區域免被硬化福射照到,而透明 -23-= Multi-fiber-partial deflection into the deflection duct of the deflection member to induce some deflection fibers or a part of it to be deposited on the XY plane of the deflection member. Xuexian structure: and gate essence to form a semi-shaped fiber knot-shaped fiber structure The self-biasing member is separated to form the fiber 2 method of the present invention. The method can further include: placing the surname #, 具有 with a semi-shaped fiber structure thereon, on the surface of the tank, so as to make the semi-shaped fiber, the structure < part Steps of densification. The step of biasing a portion of the plurality of fibers may include applying mechanical pressure to the fibers or a fluid pressure difference such as air pressure to the plurality of fibers. In one example, the paper disposed on the biasing member may be covered with a sheet of releasable material, so that the paper is matched between the sheet of flexible material and the biasing member. The air permeability of the flexible material sheet is smaller than that of the biasing member. Applying a fluid pressure difference to the material sheet may cause at least a portion of the material sheet to be biased toward the papermaking belt and at least a portion of the paper sheet to be biased into the duct of the papermaking belt. The plurality of fibers may be selected from any fibers known in the art, such as, for example, cellulose fibers, synthetic fibers, or any combination thereof. Numerous fibers can also be used to form and supply wet paper. One part of the paper can be effectively deflected into the void space formed between the deflecting duct and the hanging part of the deflecting member and the x_γ plane. The present invention also provides a mask for use in a hardening method of a hardenable material, such as a photosensitive resin material suitable for manufacturing a biasing member of the present invention. In a specific example, the mask of the present invention includes an upper surface and a bottom surface opposite to the upper surface, and -18 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 _ B7 ^ _______ 5 Explanation of the invention (16) The structure of the pattern of transparent and opaque areas, wherein the opaque areas include at least a first opaque area having a first opacity and at least a second opaque area having a second opacity different from the first opacity. Transparent and opaque areas can contain non-random and repeating patterns. The opaque region may include a substantially continuous pattern, a substantially semi-continuous pattern, a pattern formed from a plurality of independent regions, or any combination thereof. Furthermore, the first and second opaque regions may include non-random and repeating patterns. The first opaque region, the second opaque region, or both the first and second opaque regions may include a substantially continuous pattern, a substantially semi-continuous pattern, a pattern formed by a plurality of independent regions, or any combination thereof. The second opaque area may be adjacent to or away from the first opaque area. The opaque area may contain more than two different opacity. For example, the mask according to the present invention may include a third opaque region having a third opacity in the middle of the first opacity and the second opacity. In a specific example, the opaque area includes a gradient opacity that gradually changes in at least one direction. The areas of gradient opacity may include a first opaque area, a second opaque area, or separate from them. Gradient opacity can be changed in equal increments or in unequal increments in one or several directions. In another specific example, the mask includes a three-dimensional shape, such as a pattern of protrusions extending from at least one side of the mask. The protrusions extending from the bottom surface of the mask can be made to have a structure and configuration that can be embossed on the hardenable material coating to form corresponding dents or voids in the coating. The protrusions extending from the top of the mask can be made into a structure and configuration that can provide voids. Liquid hardenable materials can flow into the voids to approximate the outline of the mask. Either or two of the protrusion patterns can contain real-19- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (17) Quality continuous pattern, substantially semi-continuous pattern , A pattern formed by many independent areas, or any combination thereof. Either or two protrusion patterns can be combined with transparent and opaque areas to form a combined non-random and repeating pattern. In one such example, the opaque region includes the distal surface of the protrusion. In a specific example of the mask, the patterns of the transparent region and the opaque region are each unique and can be separated from the pattern of the protrusion. Such a mask may include a composite structure formed by at least a first element and a second element juxtaposed with its face-to-face relationship, wherein the first element forms a pattern of transparent and opaque regions and the second element forms a pattern of protrusions. The first and second elements in such a composite mask can be stacked to form a combined non-random and repeating pattern of opaque areas and protrusions. Masks with differential opacity can be used in the method of hardening hardenable materials to construct the biasing members of the present invention. For example, when a mask containing first and second opacity is fixed between the hardening radiation source and the coating of the hardenable material to selectively shield the coating from hardening radiation, the first opacity having the first opacity The first area of the area-shielding coating is protected from hardening radiation so that the first area remains non-hardened throughout the thickness of the coating, and the second opaque area with the second opacity partially shields the second area of the coating to The hardening radiation is allowed to harden the coating to a thickness less than the entire thickness of the coating, while the transparent area leaves the third area of the coating unshielded to allow the hardening radiation to harden the hardenable material to its entire thickness. If a mask with gradient opacity is used to harden the coating, the area with gradient opacity, that is, the corresponding area of the shielding coating is protected from hardening radiation, so that the corresponding area is hardened to gradually become opaque with the mask. -20- The scale of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 559632 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (18) The gradual change in thickness associated with opacity. For example, if the gradient opacity changes (increases or decreases) in one direction in equal increments or decrements, the hardening depth of the corresponding area of the coating will also change gradually in equal decrements or increments. Of course, the gradient opacity can be changed in increments. The mask of the present invention can be manufactured by a method comprising: providing a thin transparent material of substantially uniform thickness; forming a pattern of opaque areas on the material according to a first predetermined pattern; and embossing the material according to a second predetermined pattern. The method may be configured to substantially connect the first predetermined pattern and the second predetermined pattern to form a merged random repeating pattern. For example, the steps of forming the opaque area and embossing the material by the floating flower may be performed simultaneously. The step of forming a pattern of opaque areas may include applying ink to selected areas of a thin transparent material. The selection area may comprise a distal surface of the material embossed area. Masks with areas of differential opacity can be formed in a multi-step process, including printing a transparent film to form a pattern of opaque areas with a specific initial opacity, and then printing the film as needed (second, third, fourth, etc.) ) Times to form a pattern of opaque areas with another transparency that is different from the original opacity (or mutually different). Differential opacity can also be formed by one-step printing, such as by photographic gravure printing rollers containing patterns with different depths to accept ink. The ink transferred from the gravure printing roll to the transparent film at the time of printing will have an area of differential intensity-reflecting the difference in depth of the roller pattern-of the area. Other methods of forming opaque regions can also be used in the present invention, including, but not limited to, chemical, electromagnetic, laser, thermal, and the like. On the other hand, a method for manufacturing a biased member of the present invention using the three-dimensional mask described above includes the following steps: -21-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ______ B7 5 、 Explanation (5 一) " '-Provide a coating of liquid hardenable material supported by the forming surface, the coating has a bottom surface facing the forming surface, an upper surface opposite to the bottom surface, and an upper and bottom surface intermediate surface A defined first thickness; providing a source of hardening radiation constructed and configured to emit hardening radiation to harden a coating supported by a forming surface; providing a mask 'a first pattern having transparent and opaque areas therein and from the mask A second pattern of a protrusion extending outwardly; the mask is fixed between the coating and the hardened radiation source so that the second pattern of the protrusion is at least partially submerged in the coating, thereby forming a three-dimensional void therein ; Harden the hardenable material, wherein the opaque area of the first pattern at least partially shields the selected area of the coating from being illuminated by the hardening radiation source so that the selected area Hardened to at least a portion of the first thickness to form a semi-formed biasing member; and removing almost all uncured material from the semi-formed biased member to leave a cured resin structure forming the biased member; the biased member includes a self-coating The huge single plane pattern frame on the paper surface formed on the upper surface of the layer and the back surface formed on the bottom surface of the coating. As explained above, the first pattern, the second pattern, or both the first pattern and the second pattern may be non-random and repeating. Depending on the specific example of the mask, the mask may be fixed such that the second pattern of the protrusions is submerged into the selected area at least partially obscured by the opaque area of the first pattern of the mask. Alternatively or in addition, the mask may be fixed such that the second pattern of the protrusions is submerged into a selected area which is not obscured by the opaque area of the first pattern of the mask. -22- This paper size uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (20) In a specific example, the mask includes a thin film and its iI A composite structure formed by a floating flower pressing element; the floating flower pressing element forms a second pattern of protrusions. In this specific example, the embossed pressing element, film, or both the embossed pressing element and film may include opaque regions. If both the embossed pressed element and the film include opaque areas, it may be advantageous for the opaque areas of the embossed pressed element and the opaque area of the film to cooperate to form the first pattern of the transparent and opaque areas. Floating pressed elements can be transparent to hardened radiation. Alternatively, the floating flower pressing element may be radiopaque to hardening radiation. In a specific example, the floating flower pressing element has a gap throughout the body. Such embossed pressing elements may include, for example, but are not limited to, woven elements or screens having open areas throughout the body. A method for manufacturing a biased member using a composite mask may include the steps of: providing a coating of a liquid hardenable material supported by a forming surface, the coating having a bottom surface facing the forming surface, an upper surface opposite to the bottom surface, and an upper contact A first thickness defined in the middle of the bottom surface; providing a source of hardening radiation constructed and configured to emit hardening radiation to harden the coating supported by the forming surface; providing embossed pressing elements and placing the embossed pressing elements on the upper surface of the coating Juxtaposed so that the floating flower day-making element is at least partially submerged in the coating, thereby forming a pattern of voids in the coating; providing a film and juxtaposing the film with the floating flower pressing element, wherein the floating flower pressing element and the film jointly include a transparent area And opaque areas, where the opaque areas shield the coatings-some areas are protected from hardening rays, and transparent -23-

559632 A7 B7559632 A7 B7

五、發明説明(21 ) 區域則使塗層之其他區域未被遮蔽; 藉由使塗層通過浮花壓製元件及薄膜曝露於硬化轉射以使 塗層之未被遮蔽區域硬化,而同時讓經遮蔽之塗層不硬 化,因而形成半成形偏向構件;及 自半成形偏向構件移除幾乎全部未硬化之材料以留下硬化 之樹脂結構,其包含具有自塗層上表面形成之紙匹面及自 塗層底表面形成之背面之巨大單平面圖案框構。 在其工業應用中,此處所述每一種製造偏向構件之方法 皆可包含連續方法。例如,利用三維度掩模製造偏向構件 之連續方法,包含以下步骤: 提供由成形表面支撑之液體可硬化材料塗層,並連續地在 機器方向移動成形表面及塗層,該塗層具有面向成形表面 之底表面、與底表面相反之上表面及上與底表面中間所界 定之第一厚度; 提供建構及配置成可發射硬化輻射以使由成形表面所支撑 在機器方向移動之塗層連續地硬化之硬化輻射源; 連續地提供透明薄膜; 連續地印刷薄膜以在其中形成不透明區域之第一圖案; 連續地浮花壓製薄膜以在其中形成突出物之第二圖案; 連續地移動具有不透明區域之第一圖案及突出物之第二圖 案之薄膜以使該薄膜固定於塗層與硬化福射源中間,使得 突出物之第二圖案至少沒入塗層中,因而在其中形成三維 度空隙; 連續地使可硬化材料硬化,其中第一圖案之不透明區域至 -24- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 559632 A7V. Description of the invention (21) The other areas of the coating are not masked; the unshielded areas of the coating are hardened by exposing the coating to the hardened radiation through the embossed pressing element and the film, while allowing the coating to harden. The masked coating is not hardened, thereby forming a semi-formed biasing member; and removing almost all uncured material from the semi-formed biasing member to leave a hardened resin structure that includes a paper surface formed from the upper surface of the coating And a huge single plane pattern frame on the back surface formed from the bottom surface of the coating. In its industrial application, every method of manufacturing a biasing member described herein may include a continuous method. For example, a continuous method for manufacturing a biased member using a three-dimensional mask includes the steps of: providing a coating of a liquid hardenable material supported by a forming surface, and continuously moving the forming surface and the coating in a machine direction, the coating having a facing surface forming A first thickness defined by the bottom surface of the surface, the top surface opposite the bottom surface, and the middle between the top and bottom surfaces; providing a coating constructed and configured to emit hardening radiation to continuously support a machined surface supported by the forming surface Source of hardened hardening radiation; Continuously providing a transparent film; Continuously printing the film to form a first pattern of opaque areas therein; Continuously embossing the film to form a second pattern of protrusions therein; Continuously moving an opaque area The first pattern of the first pattern and the second pattern of the projection so that the film is fixed between the coating and the hardened radiation source, so that the second pattern of the projection is at least submerged in the coating, thereby forming a three-dimensional void therein; Continuously harden the hardenable material, where the opaque area of the first pattern reaches -24- Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) 559632 A7

少部份遮蔽可硬化材料之選定區域免被硬化輻射照到,以 使得選定之區域硬化至塗層第一厚度之至少一部份,因而 形成半成形偏向構件;及 連續地自半成形偏向構件移除幾乎全部未硬化之材料以留 下硬化之樹脂結構,其包含具有自塗層上表面形成之紙匹 面及自塗層底表面形成之背面之巨大單平面圖案框構。 附圖之簡單説明 圖1係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏向 構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所形 成之框構,第一層與第二層各包含連續網絡及分散於其整 體之眾多獨立偏向導管。 八 裝 圖2係圖1所示偏向構件,沿圖i線2-2所取之概略瞬時剖 面圖,且也顯示配置於偏向構件上之本發明之纖維紙匹。 圖3係本發明偏向構件之另一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏 訂A small portion shields a selected area of the hardenable material from being exposed to hardening radiation, so that the selected area is hardened to at least a portion of the first thickness of the coating, thereby forming a semi-formed deflection member; and continuously from the semi-formed deflection member; Almost all of the unhardened material is removed to leave a hardened resin structure, which includes a large uniplanar pattern frame with a paper surface formed from the upper surface of the coating and a back surface formed from the bottom surface of the coating. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of a biasing member of the present invention; the biasing member includes a frame structure formed by joining a first layer and a second layer in a face-to-face relationship, and the first layer and the second layer The layers each consist of a continuous network and numerous independent biasing ducts scattered throughout its entirety. Eight packs Fig. 2 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view taken along the line 2-2 of the deflection member shown in Fig. 1, and also shows the fiber paper of the present invention arranged on the deflection member. Fig. 3 is a schematic plan view of another specific example of the biasing member of the present invention;

向構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所 形成心框構,其中第一層包含連續網絡而第二層則包含半 連續網絡。 ° 圖4係圖3所示偏向構件,沿圖3線4 · 4所取之概略瞬時剖 面圖。 圖5係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏向 構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所形 成之框構,其中第一層包含連續網絡而第二層則包含眾多 獨立突出物。 圖6係圖5所示偏向構件,沿圖5線6 _ 6所取之概略瞬時剖 -25-Directional components include a heart-frame structure formed by the first layer and the second layer joined together in a face-to-face relationship, where the first layer contains a continuous network and the second layer contains a semi-continuous network. ° Fig. 4 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view of the deflection member shown in Fig. 3, taken along line 4 · 4 of Fig. 3. FIG. 5 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of a biasing member of the present invention; the biasing member includes a frame structure formed by joining a first layer and a second layer in a face-to-face relationship, wherein the first layer includes a continuous network and the second layer Contains many independent protrusions. Fig. 6 is a schematic instantaneous section of the deflection member shown in Fig. 5 taken along line 6_6 of Fig. 5 -25-

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(23 ) —^ - 面圖。 圖7係本發明偏向構件之—具體例之概略平面圖;該偏向 構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所形 成(框構,其中第一層包含半連續網絡而第二層則包含連 續網絡。 圖8係圖7所示偏向構件,沿圖7線8·8所取之概略瞬時剖 面圖。 圖9係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖·該偏向 構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所形 成之框構,其中第一層及第二層各包含半連續網絡。 圖1 〇係圖9所示偏向構件,沿圖9線丨〇 _〖〇所取之概略瞬 時剖面圖。 圖10A係圖9所不偏向構件,沿圖9線1〇A-1〇A所取之概 略剖面圖。 圖1 1係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏 向構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所 形成4框構,其中第一層及第二層各包含半連續網絡而第 二層則包含眾多獨立突出物。 圖1 2係圖1 1所示偏向構件,沿圖丨丨線丨2 _丨2所取之概略 瞬時剖面圖。 圖1 2 A係圖1 1所示偏向構件,沿圖丨丨線丨2 A ·丨2 a所取 之概略瞬時剖面圖。 圖1 3係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏 向構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所 -26- I紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇 X 297公 559632 A7 T^—_____ Β7 五、發明説明(24 )-- 形成之框構’其中第一層包含眾多獨立突出物而第二層則 包含連續網絡。 圖1 4係圖1 3所示偏向構件,沿圖1 3線1 4 - 1 4所取之概略 瞬時剖面圖。 圖15係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏 向構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所 形成之框構’其中第一層包含眾多獨立突出物而第二層則 包含半連續網絡。 圖1 6係圖1 5所示偏向構件,沿圖1 5線1 6 - 1 6所取之概略 瞬時剖面圖。 圖1 7係本發明偏向構件之一具體例之概略平面圖;該偏 向構件包含由第一層與第二層以面對面關係接合在一起所 形成之框構,其中第一層及第二層各包含眾多獨立突出 物。 圖1 8係圖1 7所示偏向構件,沿圖1 7線丨8 _丨8所取之概略 瞬時剖面圖。 圖1 9係根據本發明製造偏向構件之方法之一具體例之概 略剖面圖。 圖2 0係根據本發明製造偏向構件之方法之一具體例片段 之概略平面圖;顯示具有透明及不透明區域之掩模,掩模 係配置在可硬化材料塗層之上。 圖2 1係製造偏向構件之方法之具體例之概略剖面圖;概 略顯示可硬化材料塗層透過圖2 0所示及沿圖2 0線2 1 - 2 1所 取掩模之選擇性硬化。 -27- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(25 圖22A-22C係根據本發明製造偏向構件之方法之各種具 體例之概略及部份平面圖;每一種皆顯示具有透明及不透 明區域之掩模之代表性具體例。 圖2 3係製造圖2 2 A所示及沿圖2 2 A線2 3 - 2 3所取偏向構 件之方法之具體例之概略瞬時剖面圖;概略顯示可硬化材 料塗層王選擇性硬化。 圖2 4係類似於圖2 3所示及沿圖2 2 B線2 4 - 2 4所取之概略 瞬時剖面圖。 圖2 5係類似於圖2 2及2 4所示及沿圖2 2 C線2 5 - 2 5所取之 概略瞬時剖面圖。 圖2 5 A係類似於圖2 4所示,顯示掩模三維度圖案具體例 之概略瞬時剖面圖。 圖2 6係本發明纖維結構之概略平面圖;該纖維結構包含 實質連續且巨大單平面網絡區域及分佈於其整體之眾多獨 立枕狀物。 圖2 7係圖2 6所示及沿線2 7 - 2 7所取纖維紙匹之概略瞬時 剖面圖。 圖2 8係本發明纖維結構之概略平面圖;該纖維結構包含 網絡區域及枕狀物之半連續圖案。 圖2 9係圖2 8所示及沿線2 9 - 2 9所取纖維紙匹之概略瞬時 剖面圖。 圖3 0係本發明纖維結構一部份之概略瞬時剖面圖;更詳 細顯示具有纖維懸臂部份之枕狀物。 圖3 1係類似於圖3 0所示纖維結構之另一概略瞬時剖面 -28- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐ί 裝 訂559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (23) — ^-Surface view. FIG. 7 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of a biased member of the present invention; the biased member includes a first layer and a second layer joined together in a face-to-face relationship (frame structure, where the first layer includes a semi-continuous network and the second The layer contains a continuous network. Fig. 8 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view of the deflection member shown in Fig. 7, taken along line 8 and 8 of Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of the deflection member of the present invention. The deflection member contains The frame structure formed by the first layer and the second layer joined together in a face-to-face relationship, wherein the first layer and the second layer each include a semi-continuous network. Fig. 10 is a biased member shown in Fig. 9, along the line of Fig. 9 丨〇_ 〖〇 The schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view taken. Fig. 10A is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line 10A-10A of Fig. 9 without deflection members. Fig. 1 1 is one of the deflection members of the present invention. A schematic plan view of a specific example; the biasing member includes a four-frame structure formed by joining the first layer and the second layer in a face-to-face relationship, wherein the first layer and the second layer each include a semi-continuous network and the second layer includes a plurality of Independent protrusions. The deflection member is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view taken along the line 丨 丨 line 丨 2 _ 丨 2. Figure 1 2 A is the deflection member shown in FIG. 1 1 and taken along the line 丨 丨 line 丨 2 A · 丨 2 a Instantaneous cross-sectional view. Figure 1 3 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of a biasing member of the present invention; the biasing member includes a first layer and a second layer joined together in a face-to-face relationship. CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 public 559632 A7 T ^ ______ B7 V. Description of the invention (24)-the formation of the frame 'where the first layer contains many independent protrusions and the second layer contains a continuous network. Figure 14 is a deflection member shown in FIG. 13 and is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view taken along line 1 4 to 14 of FIG. 13. FIG. 15 is a schematic plan view of a specific example of the deflection member of the present invention; The frame formed by the first layer and the second layer joined together in a face-to-face relationship, where the first layer contains many independent protrusions and the second layer contains a semi-continuous network. Fig. 15 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view taken on lines 16-16. Fig. 1 7 is the present invention. A schematic plan view of a specific example of a deflection member; the deflection member includes a frame structure formed by joining a first layer and a second layer in a face-to-face relationship, wherein the first layer and the second layer each include a plurality of independent protrusions. Fig. 18 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view of the deflecting member shown in Fig. 17 taken along the line 丨 8 _ 丨 8 in Fig. 17. Fig. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a specific example of a method for manufacturing a deflecting member according to the present invention. Fig. 20 is a schematic plan view of a fragment of a specific example of a method of manufacturing a biased member according to the present invention; showing a mask with transparent and opaque areas, the mask being disposed on a hardenable material coating. Fig. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a specific example of a method for manufacturing a biased member; it schematically shows selective hardening of a coating of a hardenable material through a mask shown in Fig. 20 and taken along lines 2 1-2 1 of Fig. 20. -27- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (25 Figure 22A-22C is a summary of various specific examples of the method of manufacturing a biased member according to the present invention And some plan views; each shows a representative specific example of a mask with transparent and opaque areas. Figure 2 3 shows the biased members manufactured as shown in Figure 2 2 A and taken along line 2 2 A-2 3 A schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view of a specific example of the method; the outline shows the selective hardening of the hardenable material coating. Figure 2 4 is similar to that shown in Figure 23 and taken along the line 2 2-2 4 of Figure 2 B Instantaneous cross-sectional view. Figure 2 5 is a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view similar to that shown in Figures 2 2 and 24 and taken along line 2 2 C-2 5-2 5. Figure 2 5 A is similar to that shown in Figure 24 A schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view showing a specific example of the three-dimensional pattern of the mask. Figure 26 is a schematic plan view of the fiber structure of the present invention; the fiber structure includes a substantially continuous and large single-plane network area and a plurality of independent pillows distributed throughout the whole. Figure 2 7 is the outline of the fiber paper shown in Figure 26 and taken along the line 2 7-2 7 Figure 2 is a schematic plan view of the fiber structure of the present invention; the fiber structure includes a semi-continuous pattern of network regions and pillows. Figure 2 9 is a fiber shown in Figure 28 and taken along the line 2 9-2 9 A schematic instantaneous sectional view of a paper. Fig. 30 is a schematic instantaneous sectional view of a part of the fiber structure of the present invention; a pillow with a fiber cantilever portion is shown in more detail. Fig. 31 is a fiber similar to that shown in Fig. 30 Another rough instantaneous profile of the structure-28- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297mm) binding

559632 A7 B7559632 A7 B7

五、發明説明(26 ) 圖。 圖3 2 - 4 1係顯微圖片,以剖面顯示本發明纖維結構之實 例。 圖4 2係根據本發明一具體例製造纖維結構之方法之概略 剖面圖。 圖4 3係本發明包含二疊片接合在一起的層疊纖維結構一 具體例之概略剖面圖。 圖44係本發明包含二疊片接合在一起的層疊纖維結構另 一具體例之概略剖面圖。 圖4 5及4 6係顯微圖案,顯示先前技藝纖維結構剖面構型 之實例。 圖4 7係圖4 6所示先前技藝纖維結構之枕狀物之概略剖面 圖0 圖4 8及4 9係以瞬時剖面圖概略顯示本發明多層偏向構件 之具體例;該多層偏向構件包含第一及第二層,第一層之 形變性(deformability)大於第二層之形變性。在圖48中偏 向構件顯示未受壓縮力,而在圖49中偏向構件顯示係在施 加壓縮力下。 圖5 0係根據本發明製造偏向構件之方法之具體例之概略 剖面圖;顯示形成具有突出物之方法。 圖5 1係利用三維度浮花壓製元件製造偏向構件之方法之 具體例之概略剖面圖。 5 2係製造本發明偏向構件之方法之具體例之概略 :其中掩模包含複合結構 ° 裝 訂5. Description of the invention (26) Figure. Figures 3-4 are micrographs of series 1 showing an example of the fibrous structure of the present invention in cross section. Fig. 42 is a schematic sectional view of a method for manufacturing a fiber structure according to a specific example of the present invention. Fig. 43 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a specific example of a laminated fiber structure including two laminated sheets joined together according to the present invention. Fig. 44 is a schematic sectional view of another specific example of a laminated fiber structure including two laminated sheets joined together according to the present invention. Figures 45 and 46 are micropatterns showing examples of cross-sectional configurations of prior art fiber structures. Figure 4 7 is a schematic sectional view of the pillow of the prior art fiber structure shown in Figure 4 6. Figures 4 8 and 4 9 are instantaneous sectional views showing specific examples of the multilayer biasing member of the present invention; the multilayer biasing member includes a first For the first and second layers, the deformability of the first layer is greater than that of the second layer. The biasing member is shown in FIG. 48 to be uncompressed, and the biasing member is shown to be under compression in FIG. 49. Fig. 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a specific example of a method of manufacturing a biasing member according to the present invention; showing a method of forming a protrusion. Fig. 51 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a specific example of a method of manufacturing a biased member using a three-dimensional floating pattern pressing element. 5 2 is a summary of a specific example of a method for manufacturing a biased member of the present invention: wherein the mask includes a composite structure ° binding

k -29-k -29-

559632 A7 B7559632 A7 B7

五、發明説明(27 圖5 2 A係圖5 2箭頭方向所取浮花壓t、, π化H 7C件疋邵份平 «I 叫 0 圖53係具有可透流體偏向導管之本發明偏向構件—具體 例之概略瞬時剖面圖。 圖5 4係本發明方法一具體例之概略剖而 , 仰:% y面圖,其中纖維係 配置在本發明偏向構件與可撓材料片中間。 發明之詳細說明 姨向構件 如圖1-18所示,本發明之偏向構件1〇包含巨大單平面圖 案框構20。圖案框構20可由各種材料製成,包含但不限 於:樹脂材料、金屬、經金屬浸潰之樹脂、 纽合:然而,如此處所用,"框構"一詞並不包括= 壬;可 直之父織纖絲所形成的結構,如成形網或類似形成之結 構。此種包含眾多相互垂直纖絲之結構可用在本發明之偏 向構件1 0中作爲補強元件(此將在以下討論),但不構成偏 向構件1 0之”框構,,。 若偏向構件10之框構2〇係由樹脂材料或具不足固有強度 之其他材料所製成,或具有在機器方向拉動時會扭曲之圖 案(以下説明)時,則一般使用補強元件5 〇來補強偏向構件 10之框構20。補強元件50在圖案框構20包含半連續圖案 或包含眾多獨立突出物之圖案時也許必要,此將在以下作 更詳細討論。補強元件5 〇係固定在框構2 〇之紙匹面2 1與 至少一邵份背面2 2之中間。雖然補強元件5 〇 —般係平行於 框構t背面2 2,但補強元件5 〇之一部份可延伸超過框構 -30- 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(28~) " 2 0之背面2 2,因而在框構2 0之背面2 2產生表面不規則 性,此將在以下作更詳細討論。在一些具體例中,補強元 件5 0包含框構2 0之背面2 2。 圖案框構20可接合至補強元件50。補強元件50具有上面 51及與上面51相反之下面52。框構20之紙匹面21與補強 元件50之上面51面向一方向。而框構20之背面22與補強 元件5 0之下面5 2則面向相反方向。如此處所述,框構之背 面22形成X-Y平面。由於補強元件50 —般係最靠近框構 20 之背面 22(圖2、4、6、8、10、12、14、16 及 18), 故也可説,在某些具體例中,補強元件5〇整體界定X-Y平 面。熟諳本技藝者應瞭解,符號” X ”、” γ ”及” Z ”係代表直 角座標(Cartesian coordinates)之系統,其中相互垂直之 ” X ”及” Y ”界定由框構2 0之背面2 2 (或由補強元件5 0 )所形 成之基準平面,當偏向構件1 〇係配置在平坦表面時;而 ” Z "則界定與X _ Y平面所形成之正交。如此處所用,” z _方 向π —詞代表垂直於X - Y平面之任何方向。同樣地,,,z •方 向"一詞意指平行於Z ·方向測得之尺寸、距離或參數。然 而,應小心注意的是,在Z ·方向”延伸”之元件本身不一定 要嚴格平行於Z -方向定向;在本文中,,,在Z -方向延伸》,一 詞僅表示元件係在不平行於Χ-Υ平面之方向延伸。同樣 地’ ”在平行於X - Y平面之方向延伸”之元件不必整體都平 行於X-Y平面·,此種元件可定向於不平行於1方向之方 向0 熟請本技藝者也將瞭解,補強元件50以及偏向構件10整 -31 · 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規4_( 210 X 297公S---- 559632 A7 B7 述0 眾多基底3 0在其中形成空間。基底3 〇間的空間即形成所 謂的”偏向導管”。導管可在Ζ-方向自框構20之紙匹面2 i 向背面2 2延伸並提供間,使眾多纖維在本發明之造紙過程 中可偏向進入其以形成纖維結構5〇〇之所謂纖維,,枕狀物,, 540(圖27-4 1)。在可透流體之偏向構件1〇中,偏向導管係 自紙匹面21至背面22延伸通過框構20之整個厚度。纖維 枕狀物540之密度可低於纖維結構5〇〇其餘部份之密度,因 此促進纖維結構500整體之吸收性及柔軟度。枕狀物54〇之 單位重量可大於纖維結構5〇〇其餘部份之單位重量。枕狀 物540也有助於增加纖維結構5〇〇之總表面積,因而進一步 促進其吸收性及柔軟度。 如此處所用’所謂懸吊邵份必須在至少一方向自眾多基 底3 0延伸’係意指母一懸吊部份4 9在垂直於X .· γ平面之橫 切面觀看時係在不平行於Z -方向且可實質平行於χ-γ平面 之方向橫向延伸。如此處所用,所謂懸吊部份49必須自χ_ Υ平面升南’係意指懸吊邵份4 9或其至少一部份與X _ γ平 面之間的Ζ -方向有自由空間或間隙。亦即,懸吊部份4 9係 ”懸吊”因爲彼等係自X- Υ平面或補強元件5 〇升高並在懸吊 部份與Χ-Υ平面間存在間隙或空隙。然而,應注意的是, 懸吊部份4 9不必在懸吊部份4 9之整個長度形成間隙。亦 即’由於例如偏向構件1 〇或懸吊部份4 9脱離平面或變形, 懸吊部份49會在其長度之某一點接觸補強元件5〇,祇要懸 吊部份4 9本身不直接接何於補強元件5 〇即可。同時,懸吊 -33- 本紙浪尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1559632V. Description of the invention (27 Figure 5 2 A series Figure 5 2 Floating pressure t, taken from the direction of the arrow t ,, πH 7C pieces Shao Fenping «I called 0 Figure 53 is the bias of the present invention with a fluid-permeable bias tube Component—a schematic instantaneous cross-sectional view of a specific example. Figure 54 is a schematic cross-section of a specific example of the method of the present invention. Top:% y plan view, in which the fiber system is arranged between the biasing member and the flexible material sheet of the present invention. Detailed description of the directional component is shown in Figure 1-18. The directional component 10 of the present invention includes a huge single-plane pattern frame 20. The pattern frame 20 can be made of various materials, including but not limited to: resin materials, metals, warp Metal-impregnated resins, knots: However, as used herein, the term "framework" does not include structures formed by straight straight woven fibrils, such as formed nets or similar structures. This A structure including a plurality of mutually perpendicular filaments can be used as a reinforcing element in the biasing member 10 of the present invention (this will be discussed below), but does not constitute a “frame” of the biasing member 10. If the frame of the biasing member 10 Structure 20 is made of resin material or not When it is made of other materials with inherent strength or has a pattern that will be distorted when pulled in the machine direction (described below), the reinforcing element 50 is generally used to reinforce the frame 20 of the biasing member 10. The reinforcing element 50 is in the pattern frame 20 It may be necessary to include a semi-continuous pattern or a pattern containing a plurality of independent protrusions, which will be discussed in more detail below. The reinforcing element 5 〇 is fixed to the frame 2 ○ paper surface 2 1 and at least one back surface 2 2 in the middle. Although the reinforcing element 50 is generally parallel to the back surface 2 of the frame structure t, a part of the reinforcing element 50 may extend beyond the frame structure -30- 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (28 ~) & quot The back surface 22 of 20, thus causing surface irregularities on the back surface 22 of the frame 20, which will be discussed in more detail below. In some specific examples, the reinforcing element 50 includes the back surface of the frame 20 2 2. The pattern frame 20 can be joined to the reinforcing element 50. The reinforcing element 50 has an upper surface 51 and a lower surface 52 opposite to the upper surface 51. The paper surface 21 of the frame structure 20 and the upper surface 51 of the reinforcing element 50 face one direction. The frame 20 of the back surface of the structure 20 and 50 of the reinforcing element The surface 5 2 faces in the opposite direction. As described here, the back surface 22 of the frame structure forms an XY plane. Since the reinforcing element 50 is generally the back surface 22 closest to the frame structure 20 (Figures 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12) , 14, 16, and 18), it can be said that in some specific examples, the reinforcing element 50 defines the XY plane as a whole. Those skilled in the art should understand that the symbols "X", "γ" and "Z" represent Cartesian coordinates system, in which “X” and “Y” which are perpendicular to each other define the reference plane formed by the back surface 2 2 of the frame 20 (or by the reinforcing element 50), when it is biased toward the member 1 0 series When configured on a flat surface, "Z " defines the orthogonality formed by the X_Y plane. As used herein, the "z_directionπ" word represents any direction perpendicular to the X-Y plane. Similarly, the word z-direction " means a dimension, distance, or parameter measured parallel to the Z-direction. However, it should be noted that elements that "extend" in the Z-direction do not have to be oriented strictly parallel to the Z-direction; in this context, the term "extend in the Z-direction" simply means that the element is not Extending in a direction parallel to the X-Υ plane. Similarly, "" elements extending in a direction parallel to the X-Y plane "need not be all parallel to the XY plane. Such elements can be oriented in a direction that is not parallel to the 1 direction. Those skilled in the art will also understand that the reinforcing element 50 and the deflection member 10 are integral -31 · This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation 4_ (210 X 297 male S ---- 559632 A7 B7) 30 forms a space in it. The space between the base 30 forms a so-called "biased duct". The duct can extend in the Z-direction from the paper surface 2 i of the frame 20 to the back surface 2 2 and provide a number of fibers. It can be biased into the papermaking process of the present invention The so-called fibers that form the fibrous structure 500, pillows, 540 (Figure 27-4 1). In the fluid-permeable deflection member 10, the deflection duct extends from the paper surface 21 to the back surface 22 through the frame The entire thickness of the structure 20. The density of the fiber pillow 540 may be lower than the density of the rest of the fiber structure 500, thus promoting the absorbency and softness of the fiber structure 500 as a whole. The unit weight of the pillow 54 may be greater than The unit weight of the rest of the fiber structure 500. Pillow 540 also helps to increase the total surface area of the fiber structure 500, thus further promoting its absorbency and softness. As used herein, the so-called suspension must be in the Extending in at least one direction from a plurality of bases 30 means that the mother-suspended portion 49 is not parallel to the Z-direction and may be substantially parallel to χ-γ when viewed in a cross-section perpendicular to the X.. Γ plane. The direction of the plane extends laterally. As used herein, the so-called suspension portion 49 must rise south from the χ_Υ plane, means the suspension in the Z-direction between Shaofen 49 or at least a part thereof and the X_γ plane. There is free space or clearance. That is, the suspension part 4 9 series " "Hanging" because they are raised from the X-- plane or the reinforcing element 50 and there is a gap or gap between the hanging part and the X-Υ plane. However, it should be noted that the hanging part 4 9 need not be A gap is formed over the entire length of the suspension portion 49. That is, 'for example, because the deflection member 10 or the suspension portion 49 is out of plane or deformed, the suspension portion 49 will contact the reinforcing element at a certain point of its length. 50, as long as the suspension part 4 9 itself is not directly connected to the reinforcing element 5 0. At the same time, the suspension -33- this paper wave standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 1559632

IW刀4 9與χ - γ平面間的這些間隙可在其個別形狀及大小包 括Ζ-大小上有所差別,亦即,彼等在懸吊部份4 9之全部或 邵份不必相同。例如,一懸吊部份49與補強元件5〇間的距 離可與另一懸吊部份49與補強元件5〇間的距離不同(圖 25)。同時,Χ-γ平面與不同懸吊部份間的距離可逐漸變 化或可爲不規則(圖2 3 - 2 4 )。 懸吊部份49可與基底30成爲一體或牢固接合於其上。如 此處所用,”一體”(integral)懸吊部份係在製造本發明偏向 構件10之方法之一具體例之過程中和基底3〇之形成一起形 成的懸吊邵份4 9 ’此將在以下詳細討論(圖2 2 A - 2 5 A )。 π接合”懸吊部份則係和基底3 0分開製造,然後牢固接合於 基底3 0的懸吊部份。接合懸吊部份4 9之實例也將説明於以 下包含多層結構之偏向構件10之具體例而更明確言之代表 性二層偏向構件10及其製造方法(圖1-19)中。在此種具體 例中,構成偏向構件10之接合層之一即形成眾多基底3〇, 而另一層則形成懸吊部份49。爲方便起見,包含眾多基底 30之層在此也以編號30表示。 當在垂直於Χ-Υ平面之橫切面觀看時,本發明之偏向構 件10可包含二種懸吊部份49--根據與基底之相對關係: "橋連”懸吊部份及”懸臂”懸吊部份。”橋連”與”懸臂”二詞 常用於本文並希望係敘述性,因爲橋連懸吊部份係跨越或 "橋連”至少二基底之距離,因而將至少二基底相互連接。 橋連懸吊部份已顯示於例如圖9、1 0 A、1 5、2 4、2 5及 2 5 A中。這二相連基底最一般但非必要係相鄰基底。然 -34- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家搮準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 裝 訂These gaps between the IW knife 49 and the χ-γ plane may differ in their individual shapes and sizes, including the Z-size, that is, they do not have to be the same or all in the hanging portion 49. For example, the distance between one suspension portion 49 and the reinforcing element 50 may be different from the distance between another suspension portion 49 and the reinforcing element 50 (Fig. 25). At the same time, the distance between the X-γ plane and the different suspension parts can gradually change or be irregular (Fig. 2 3-2 4). The suspending portion 49 may be integrated with the base 30 or firmly coupled thereto. As used herein, the "integral" suspension is a suspension formed together with the formation of the substrate 30 during the manufacture of a specific example of the biasing member 10 of the present invention. 4 9 'This will be This is discussed in detail below (Figures 2 2 A-2 5 A). The "π-joint" suspension part is manufactured separately from the base 30, and then firmly joined to the suspension part of the base 30. The example of the joint suspension part 4 9 will also be described below with the biasing member 10 including a multilayer structure. In the specific example, the representative two-layer deflection member 10 and its manufacturing method (FIG. 1-19) are more specific. In this specific example, one of the bonding layers constituting the deflection member 10 forms a plurality of substrates 30, The other layer forms a hanging portion 49. For convenience, the layer containing a plurality of substrates 30 is also referred to herein by the number 30. When viewed in a cross-section perpendicular to the XY plane, the deflection member 10 of the present invention It can contain two kinds of suspension parts 49-according to the relative relationship with the base: " Bridge connection "suspension part and" cantilever "suspension part. The terms "bridge connection" and "cantilever" are often used in this article and are intended to be descriptive, because the bridge suspension portion spans or "bridges" the distance of at least two bases, thus connecting at least two bases to each other. The hanging parts have been shown in, for example, Figures 9, 10 A, 15, 24, 25, and 25 A. These two connected substrates are the most common but not necessarily adjacent substrates. Ran-34- This paper scale Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297mm) binding

k 559632 A7 _ B7____ 五、發明説明(32~) — ,其中相連基底不相互相鄰而由另一基底或其他基底分開 之具體例也涵蓋。(請見例如圖1 5,右”正弦”第二層元件 起第一個。)其中橋連懸吊部份將二非相鄰基底連接之另一 具體例係其中基底具差別高度俾至少一些具有相對較小高 度之基底不達到懸吊部份(未示出)之框構2 0。此等相對短 基底可固定在橋連懸吊部份所連接之相對高基底之中間。 懸臂懸吊部份係自基底3 0之一橫向延伸但當從特定橫切 面觀看時不達到相鄰基底3 0之懸吊部份4 9。懸臂懸吊部份 已顯示於例如圖1 2及2 3。 應了解的是,在某些情形,相同之懸吊部份4 9,從一橫 切面觀看會像”橋連”而.從另一橫切面觀看則像”懸臂”。例 如,在圖1 0之剖面圖中,一些懸吊部份4 9 (由第二半連續 層4 0形成,此將在以下充分詳細討論)像是形成”懸臂,,部 份,而另一些懸吊部份4 9則像是根本未受支撑。同時,在 圖1 Ο A沿第二層4 0之直線半連續元件之一所取之剖面圖 中,懸吊部份49像是”橋連”部份,因爲其跨越或橋連至少 二相鄰基底(由第一層30所形成,此將在以下討論)。 每一懸吊部份49均具有紙匹向(web_oriented)表面49a及 背表面4 9 b (圖1 0及1 0 A)。如此處所用,,,紙匹向表面”代 表形成框構2 0紙匹面2 1之懸吊部份4 9之表面。當紙匹面 配置在偏向構件10時,紙匹面表面即鄰近紙匹。在其中偏 向構件1 0包含補強元件5 0之具體例中,紙匹向表面4 9 a係 面離補強元件5 0。紙匹向表面4 9 a —般但非必要係平行於 X-Y平面。背表面49b代表與紙匹向表面49a相反之懸吊部 -35- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7k 559632 A7 _ B7____ V. Description of the Invention (32 ~) — The specific examples in which the connected substrates are not adjacent to each other but separated by another substrate or other substrates are also covered. (See, for example, Figure 15, the right "sinusoidal" second-layer element starts from the first.) Another specific example in which the bridge suspension portion connects two non-adjacent substrates is where the substrates have different heights, at least some The frame having a relatively small height does not reach the frame 20 of the hanging portion (not shown). These relatively short substrates may be fixed in the middle of the relatively high substrates to which the bridge suspension is connected. The cantilever suspension portion extends laterally from one of the substrates 30 but does not reach the suspension portion 49 of the adjacent substrate 30 when viewed from a specific cross-section. Cantilever suspension parts are shown, for example, in Figures 12 and 23. It should be understood that, in some cases, the same suspension part 49 is viewed as “bridged” from a cross section and viewed as “cantilevered” from another cross section. For example, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10, some of the overhanging portions 4 9 (formed by the second semi-continuous layer 40, which will be discussed in full detail below) look like “cantilever,” portions, and others Suspended portion 49 appears to be unsupported at the same time. At the same time, in the cross-sectional view of one of the linear semi-continuous elements on the second layer 40 along Figure 10 A, the suspended portion 49 looks like a "bridge" "Connecting" portion because it spans or bridges at least two adjacent substrates (formed by the first layer 30, which will be discussed below). Each suspension portion 49 has a web_oriented surface 49a and The back surface 4 9 b (Figs. 10 and 10 A). As used herein, "paper-facing surface" represents the surface of the hanging portion 49 forming the frame 20 paper surface 21. When the paper surface is disposed on the deflection member 10, the surface of the paper surface is adjacent to the paper. In a specific example in which the deflecting member 10 includes the reinforcing element 50, the paper sheet faces away from the reinforcing element 50 toward the surface 49a. The paper faces the surface 4 9 a—but not necessarily parallel to the X-Y plane. The back surface 49b represents the hanging part opposite to the paper-facing surface 49a. -35- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7

份49之表面。在其中偏向構件1〇包含補強元件5〇之具體 例中,背表面49b係面向補強元件5〇,而更明確言之,其 上面。 〇 ^ 圖2、4、6、8、10、1〇八、12、14、16、18、23- 25、25A、48及49以橫切面顯示懸吊部份49之各種具體 例。請參照圖23-25,編號,,49”(不管括號字尾爲何)在此 處係用以一般性代表任何部份,不管其特定具體例爲何。 同樣地,編號”49a”及”49b”(不管括號字尾爲何)係用以一 般性分別代表懸吊部份49之紙匹向表面及背表面,不管這 些表面之特定具體例爲何。每一括號自尾”(1)”、”(2),,、 ”(3 ) ”等等係代表懸吊部份4 9之代表性具體例及其對應之 紙匹向表面49a及背表面49b,此將在以下充分詳細説明。 背表面49b可實質平行於χ-γ平面及/或平行於紙匹向表 面 49a,如圖2、4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18 及 25 清 楚所示。圖23及24顯示其一些懸吊部份49之背表面49b不 平行於紙匹向表面49a及不平行於χ-γ平面之具體例。在 圖2 3中,例如,懸吊部份4 9 ( 2 )、4 9 ( 3 )及4 9 ( 4 )分別具有 相對於χ-γ平面成,,斜角"之背表面49b(2)、49“3)及 49b (4)。而且,背表面49b不一定要直線或平面。例如, 在圖23及24中,懸吊部份49(1)及49(5)分別具有基本上 直線或平坦背表面49b(l)及49b(5),而懸吊部份49(3)及 49(4)(圖23)及49(6)及49(7)(圖24)分別具有彎曲(凹或 凸)背表面 49b(3)及 49b(4)(圖 23)及 49b(6)及 49b(7) (圖 24) 〇 -36- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公 559632 A7 _____B7 五、發明説明(34 ) 應注意的是’前述懸吊部份4 9及背表面4 9 b之具體例僅 係用於證明本發明,而非限制本發明之實例。懸吊部份49 及其紙匹向及背表面49a及49b可有實際上無限量之可能組 合,變化及相互定向,包括圓形、曲線及不規則形狀,其 全部涵蓋於本發明内。彼等全部可利用以下所述製造本發 明偏向構件1 0之新穎方法設計及成形。 在圖1 - 1 8所示若干代表性具體例中,偏向構件1 〇之框構 2 0包含由至少第一層3 0及以面對面關係接合於第一層3 〇 之第二層4 0所形成的多層複合結構。所謂框構2 〇必需包含 ”至少”二層,係意指根據本發明之框構2 〇可包含二層以上 一例如,三、四、五層等等(未示出),如熟諳本技藝者應 輕易瞭解。第一及第二層30、40之每一層都具有上表面及 與上表面相反之底表面。如例如圖4、6、8、10所示,第 一層30具有上表面31及與上表面31相反之底表面32。同 樣地,第二層40具有上表面41及與上表面41相反之底表 面42。在成形框構20中,第一層30之上表面31接觸第二 層40之底表面42。第二層40之上表面41包含框構20之紙 匹面21,而第一層30之底表面32則包含框構20之背面 2 2。熟諳本技藝者應了解,”上,,及”底”二詞係説明性,僅 至偏向構件1 0在此處以若干剖面圖顯示之程度。當然,在 製造過程中,偏向構件1 〇可如此固定而致”底,,表面在”上,, 表面之上。 第一及第二層30、40每一層可具有包含至少一偏向導管 之導管部份。因此,第一層30具有包含至少一第一偏向導 -37- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇x 297公袭) 559632 A7 — _ B7 五、發明説明(35 ) 管35之第一導管部份,而第二層40則具有包含至少一第二 偏向導管4 5之第二導管部份。如此處所用,,,第一導管部 份” 3 5 —詞係代表第一層3 0中之孔或空間,此孔或空間在 Z -方向自第一層30之上表面31延伸至底表面32並建構及 配置成可在製造本發明纖維結構500之方法之過程中接納 眾多纖維。同樣地,”第二偏向導管” 4 5 —詞係代表第二層 4 0中之孔或空間,此孔或空間在z -方向自第二層4 〇之上表 面41延伸至底表面42並建構及配置成可在製造本發明纖維 結構500之方法之過程中接納眾多纖維。 在有些具體例中,導管部份係自上表面延伸通過層之整 個厚度至底表面’因而使層變成可透流體。在製造過程中 -配置在偏向構件上之纖維可在例如眞空或例如機械壓力產 生之流體壓力差之影響下偏向進入偏向導管35、45。已偏 向進入偏向導管之纖維即形成纖維結構之纖維”枕狀物”或” 圓頂狀物",此將在以下充分詳細説明。 第一層3 0及第二層4 0係以面對面配置接合在一起,使得 第一層40之一些部份在z_方向對應於第一層3〇之偏向導管 35。第二層40之這些部份,由於在z_方向位於第一層3〇 之偏向導管35之上,係在Z -方向自χ-γ平面升高,此χ_γ 平面與第一層30之底表面32同一平面而因此可形成以上討 論的懸吊部份。如此處所用,,,對應” 一詞及其變換係意指 二或若干元件間的相互物理關係,其中彼等對χ_Υ平面之 個別幾何突出物即在其上形成共同區域。 在一些具體例中,補強元件50係實質可透流體。可透流 -38 - 5^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公董]-~~ - 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(36 ) 體之補強元件5 0可包含編織網或有孔元件、氈或其任何組 合。各種型式之可透流體補強元件5 0已説明於若干概括讓 與之美國專利,例如第5,275,700及5,954,097號,其揭示内 容併於此以供參考。補強元件5 0可包含氈,其如習知造紙 所用,又稱爲”壓氈”。框構2 0可應用在補強元件5 0,如概 括讓與之美國專利所敎示:第5,549,790號( 1996年8月27日 頒予 Phan) ; 5,556,509 號(1996 年 9 月 1 7 日頒予 Trokhan 等 人);5,580,423 號(1996 年 1 2 月 3 日頒予 Ampulski 等人); 5,609,725號( 1997年 3 月 1 1 日頒予 Phan) ; 5,629,052號(1997 年5月13曰頒予Trokhan等人);5,637,194號( 1997年6月10 曰頒予Ampulski等人);5,674,663號(1997年1 0月7日頒予 McFarland 等人);5,693,187 號( 1997 年 12 月 2 日頒予 Ampulski 等人);5,709,775號( 1998年 1 月 20 日頒予Trokhan 等人);5,795,440號( 1998年8月18日頒予Ampulski等人); 5,814,190 號( 1998年 9 月 29 日頒予 Phan) ; 5,817,377號(1998 年10月6日頒予Trokhan等人);及5,846,379號( 1998年12月 8曰頒予Ampulski等人),此等專利之揭示内容均併於此以 供參考。 或者,補強元件5 0可爲不透流體。不透流體之補強元件 5 0可包含,例如,與用於製造本發明偏向構件1 〇之框構 2 0之材料相同或不同之聚合樹脂材料;塑膠材料;金屬; 任何其他適當天然或合成材料;或其任何組合。熟諳本技 藝者應瞭解的是,不透流體補強元件5 0將使偏向構件1 〇整 個也變成不透流體。 -39- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 ----—___ ____^ 五、發明説明(37 ) 應注意的是,補強元件5 〇可爲部份可透流體、部份不透 流體。亦即,補強元件5 〇之一部份可爲可透流體,而補強 元件5 0之另一部份可爲不透流體。例如,在其中補強元件 50鄰近框構之背面22固定之多層偏向構件10中,補強元 件5 0之可透流體部份可使第一層3 〇之對應偏向導管3 $ ”變 盲"(blind),亦即,對應於補強元件5()不透流體部份之第 一層之偏向導管35可不具有通過第_層30(亦即,自第一 層30之上面31至底面32)之可透流體性。 若有需要,可利用包含查卡(提花)組織(Jacquard weave ) 之補強元件5 0。具有查卡組織之例證性帶可查閲美國專利 第 5,429,686 號(7/4/95 頒予 Chiu 等人);5,672,248 號 (9/3 0/97 頒予 Wendt 等人);5,746,887 號(5/5/98 頒予 Wendt 等人);及 6,017,417號( 1/25/00 頒予 Wendt 等人), 彼等之揭示内容僅爲顯示可用於補強元件5〇之查卡組織之 主要構造之有限目的併於此以供參考。咸信上述專利所述 之無楊基(Yankeeless)造紙方法可從本發明之偏向構件i 〇 獲益。 根據本發明,第一層30之一個、若干個或全部偏向導管 35可爲•’盲目”或’’封閉”,如圖53所示之概括讓與之美國專 利第5,972,813號( 1999年10月26日頒予P〇lat等人)所述, 其揭示内容併於此以供參考。在圖53所示偏向構件之具體 例中,第一層3 0之偏向導管3 5係用材料3 3 ”封閉,,,使得 導管3 5不透流體,包括空氣及水。如上引專利所述,聚胺 基甲酸酯發泡體、橡膠及矽酮可用以使偏向導管35變成不 -40- 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632Portion of 49. In a specific example in which the deflection member 10 includes the reinforcing element 50, the back surface 49b faces the reinforcing element 50, and more specifically, the upper surface thereof. ○ ^ Figures 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 108, 12, 14, 16, 18, 23-25, 25A, 48, and 49 show various specific examples of the hanging portion 49 in a cross section. Please refer to Figures 23-25. The numbers, 49 "(regardless of the ending of the brackets) are used here to represent any part in general, regardless of their specific examples. Similarly, the numbers" 49a "and" 49b " (Regardless of the suffix of the brackets) is used to generally represent the paper surface of the hanging portion 49 toward the back and the back surface, regardless of the specific examples of these surfaces. Each bracket is from the end "(1)", "( 2) ,,, "(3)" and so on are representative specific examples of the suspension portion 49 and their corresponding paper-facing surfaces 49a and back surfaces 49b, which will be fully described in detail below. The back surface 49b may be substantially parallel to the χ-γ plane and / or parallel to the paper-facing surface 49a, as shown clearly in Figures 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 25. Figs. 23 and 24 show specific examples in which the back surface 49b of some of the hanging portions 49 is not parallel to the paper-facing surface 49a and is not parallel to the?-? Plane. In Fig. 23, for example, the suspension portions 4 9 (2), 4 9 (3), and 4 9 (4) respectively have a back surface 49b (2 ), 49 "3), and 49b (4). Also, the back surface 49b does not have to be straight or flat. For example, in Figs. 23 and 24, the suspension portions 49 (1) and 49 (5) have substantially Straight or flat back surfaces 49b (l) and 49b (5), while the suspension parts 49 (3) and 49 (4) (Figure 23) and 49 (6) and 49 (7) (Figure 24) have bends, respectively (Concave or convex) back surface 49b (3) and 49b (4) (Figure 23) and 49b (6) and 49b (7) (Figure 24) 〇-36- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public 559632 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention (34) It should be noted that the specific examples of the aforementioned suspension portion 49 and back surface 4 9b are only used to prove the invention, not to limit the invention Example: The hanging portion 49 and its paper facing and back surfaces 49a and 49b can have a virtually unlimited number of possible combinations, changes and mutual orientations, including circles, curves and irregular shapes, all of which are covered by the present invention .All of them can manufacture the biasing member 1 of the present invention using the following Designed and shaped by a novel method of 0. In some representative examples shown in Figures 1 to 18, the frame 2 of the biasing member 1 0 includes at least a first layer 3 0 and is joined to the first layer 3 in a face-to-face relationship. The multi-layer composite structure formed by the second layer 40 of 〇. The so-called frame structure 20 must include "at least" two layers, which means that the frame structure 2 according to the present invention may include more than two layers. For example, three, four, Five layers and so on (not shown), as those skilled in the art should easily understand. Each of the first and second layers 30, 40 has an upper surface and a bottom surface opposite to the upper surface. For example, Figures 4, 6 As shown in Figures 8, 8, and 10, the first layer 30 has an upper surface 31 and a bottom surface 32 opposite to the upper surface 31. Similarly, the second layer 40 has an upper surface 41 and a bottom surface 42 opposite to the upper surface 41. During molding In the frame structure 20, the upper surface 31 of the first layer 30 contacts the bottom surface 42 of the second layer 40. The upper surface 41 of the second layer 40 includes the paper surface 21 of the frame 20, and the bottom surface 32 of the first layer 30 It includes the back 2 of frame 20. 2. Those skilled in the art should understand that the words "upper," and "bottom" are illustrative, only The degree to which the deflection member 10 is shown here in several cross-sectional views. Of course, during the manufacturing process, the deflection member 10 can be so fixed as to "bottom, surface on", and above the surface. The first and second layers Each layer 30, 40 may have a duct portion containing at least one deflection duct. Therefore, the first layer 30 has a duct including at least one first deflection guide -37- This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x) 297 public attack) 559632 A7 — _ B7 V. Description of the invention (35) The first duct part of the tube 35, and the second layer 40 has a second duct part containing at least a second deflection duct 45. As used herein, "the first duct portion" 3 5 — The word represents a hole or space in the first layer 30, which hole or space extends in the Z-direction from the upper surface 31 to the bottom surface of the first layer 30 32 and constructed and configured to receive a large number of fibers during the method of manufacturing the fibrous structure 500 of the present invention. Similarly, the "second deflection duct" 4 5 — the word represents a hole or space in the second layer 40, this The hole or space extends in the z-direction from the upper surface 41 to the bottom surface 42 of the second layer 40 and is constructed and configured to receive a large number of fibers during the method of manufacturing the fiber structure 500 of the present invention. In some specific examples, The duct part extends from the upper surface through the entire thickness of the layer to the bottom surface, thus making the layer fluid-permeable. During the manufacturing process-the fibers arranged on the deflection member can be, for example, hollowed out or the fluid pressure difference generated by, for example, mechanical pressure Under the influence of the biased entry into the deflection ducts 35, 45. The fibers that have deviated into the deflection ducts form fibers "pillows" or "domes" that form a fibrous structure, which will be explained in full detail below. The first layer 30 and the second layer 40 are joined together in a face-to-face configuration so that some parts of the first layer 40 correspond in the z_ direction to the deflection ducts 35 of the first layer 30. Since these parts of the second layer 40 are located above the deflection duct 35 of the first layer 30 in the z_ direction, they are raised in the z direction from the χ-γ plane, which is at the bottom of the first layer 30 The surfaces 32 are in the same plane and thus can form the hanging portions discussed above. As used herein, the term "correspondence" and its transformations refer to the mutual physical relationship between two or more elements, where the individual geometrical protrusions of the x_χ plane form a common area thereon. In some specific examples Reinforcing element 50 is substantially permeable to fluid. Permeable -38-5 ^ Paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public directors)-~~-559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (36) The body's reinforcing element 50 may include a woven mesh or a perforated element, a felt, or any combination thereof. Various types of fluid-permeable reinforcing element 50 have been described in a number of generally assigned US patents, such as Nos. 5,275,700 and 5,954,097, The disclosure is hereby incorporated by reference. The reinforcing element 50 may include felt, which is also known as "press felt" as used in conventional papermaking. The frame structure 20 may be applied to the reinforcing element 50, as summarized and assigned to the United States. Patent Publication: No. 5,549,790 (issued to Phan on August 27, 1996); No. 5,556,509 (issued to Trokhan et al. On September 17, 1996); No. 5,580,423 (issued to Ampulski on December 3, 1996 Et al.); No. 5,609,725 (19 Awarded to Phan on March 11, 1997; No. 5,629,052 (to May 13, 1997 to Trokhan et al.); No. 5,637,194 (to June 10, 1997 to Ampulski et al.); No. 5,674,663 (1997 Awarded to McFarland et al. On 7th; No. 5,693,187 (to Ampulski et al. On December 2, 1997); No. 5,709,775 (to Trokhan et al. On January 20, 1998); No. 5,795,440 (1998 Awarded to Ampulski et al. On August 18); No. 5,814,190 (to Phan on September 29, 1998); No. 5,817,377 (to Trokhan and others on October 6, 1998); and No. 5,846,379 (December 8, 1998 Issued to Ampulski et al.), The disclosures of these patents are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the reinforcing element 50 may be fluid impervious. The fluid impervious reinforcing element 50 may include, for example, Polymeric resin materials of the same or different materials used to make the frame 10 of the biasing member 10 of the present invention; plastic materials; metals; any other suitable natural or synthetic materials; or any combination thereof. Those skilled in the art should understand that not Fluid-permeable reinforcement element 50 will deflect component 1 Whole also becomes fluid tight. -39- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 ----——___ ____ ^ V. Description of the invention (37) It should be noted that the reinforcing element 5 〇 can be a part Partially permeable and partially impermeable. That is, a part of the reinforcing element 50 may be fluid-permeable, and another part of the reinforcing element 50 may be fluid-impermeable. For example, in the multilayer deflection member 10 in which the reinforcing element 50 is fixed near the back 22 of the frame, the fluid-permeable portion of the reinforcing element 50 can make the corresponding deflection duct 3 of the first layer 3 0 "blind" ( blind), that is, the deflection duct 35 corresponding to the first layer of the fluid-impermeable part of the reinforcing element 5 () may not have a passage through the third layer 30 (that is, from the upper surface 31 to the lower surface 32 of the first layer 30). Fluid permeable. If necessary, a reinforcing element containing Jacquard weave 50 can be used. An exemplary band with a Chaca can be found in US Patent No. 5,429,686 (7/4/95 To Chiu et al .; 5,672,248 (to Wendt et al. On 9/3 0/97); 5,746,887 (to Wendt et al. On 5/5/98); and 6,017,417 (to Wendt on 1/25/00 Et al.), Their disclosures are only for the limited purpose of showing the main structure of the Chaca structure that can be used to reinforce element 50 and are hereby incorporated by reference. The Yankeeless papermaking method described in the aforementioned patent It is possible to benefit from the biasing member i 0 of the present invention. According to the present invention, the first layer 30 One, several, or all of the deflection catheters 35 may be 'blind' or 'closed', as shown generally in Figure 53 and assigned to US Patent No. 5,972,813 (issued to Polat et al. On October 26, 1999 ), Its disclosure is hereby incorporated by reference. In the specific example of the deflection member shown in FIG. 53, the deflection duct 3 5 of the first layer 30 is closed with the material 3 3 ”, so that the duct 3 5 Impervious to fluids, including air and water. As mentioned in the cited patent, polyurethane foam, rubber, and silicone can be used to make the deflection duct 35 become non--40- This paper size uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) ) 559632

透流體。 =一層30及第二層4〇各可包含連續框構、半連續框構、 眾夕獨乂突出物或其任何組合。如此處所用,”實質連續框 構” 一詞係指框構2 〇之一層,在該層中吾人可藉不中斷線 在整個線長度整個通過該層之上或之内連接該層或内之任 何二點。亦即,連續框構2〇在平行於χ-γ平面之各個方向 具有實貧連續性且僅終止於偏向構件1 〇之邊部。連續框 構20清楚顯示於圖,其中第一層3〇及第二層4〇各可包 含連續框構;圖3及5中,其中僅第一層3〇包連續框構;及 圖7及13中,其中僅第二層4〇包連續框構。,,實質,,一詞(與 連續合用)係意指雖然框構2 〇之絕對連續性爲較佳(而在設 冲及製造偏向構件1 〇時希望),但偏離絕爲連續性之微小 偏差卻可容許,祇要此等偏差不明顯影響偏向構件所設計 及希望的性能即可。在包含實質連續框構之層中,導管部 份一般包含分散於整個框構並由框構包圍的眾多偏向導 管。 實貧半連續框構” 一詞係指框構2 〇之一層,其在平行於 X-Y平面之各個方向’除至少一個方向外,皆具有,,連續性” ’及在該層中吾人無法藉不中斷線在整個線長度整個通過 該層之上或之内連接該層上或内之任何二點。當然,半連 續框構可僅在平行於X- γ平面之一個方向具有連續性。半 連續框構20清楚顯示於圖9中,其中第一層3〇及第二層4〇 各可包含半連續框構;圖7&n中,其中僅第一層3〇包半 連續框構;及圖3及15中,其中僅第二層40包半連續框 -41 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公寶)Permeable fluid. Each of the first layer 30 and the second layer 40 may include a continuous frame structure, a semi-continuous frame structure, a Zhongxi independent protrusion, or any combination thereof. As used herein, the term "substantially continuous frame" refers to a layer of frame 20, in which we can connect the layer or the interior through the entire length of the line through the entire length of the line without interruption. Any two points. That is, the continuous frame 20 has solid-lean continuity in each direction parallel to the χ-γ plane and terminates only at the edge of the deflection member 10. The continuous frame 20 is clearly shown in the figure, wherein the first layer 30 and the second layer 40 each may include a continuous frame; in FIGS. 3 and 5, only the first layer 30 includes a continuous frame; and FIGS. 7 and In 13, only the second layer of 40 packets is continuous framed. The term “, in essence,” (combined with continuity) means that although the absolute continuity of the frame 20 is better (and hoped when setting and punching the biased member 10), the deviation is absolutely small. Deviations are tolerated as long as they do not significantly affect the designed and desired performance of the deflection member. In a layer containing a substantially continuous frame, the duct portion generally contains a number of deflectors that are dispersed throughout and surrounded by the frame. The term "pure semi-continuous frame" refers to a layer of frame 20, which has 'except at least one direction in all directions parallel to the XY plane, and continuity', and in this layer we cannot borrow The uninterrupted line is connected across any two points on or within the layer through the entire length of the line. Of course, the semi-continuous frame can have continuity only in one direction parallel to the X-γ plane. The semi-continuous frame 20 is clearly shown in FIG. 9, where the first layer 30 and the second layer 40 each may include a semi-continuous frame; in FIG. 7 & n, only the first layer 30 includes a semi-continuous frame ; And in Figures 3 and 15, only the second layer of 40 packs of semi-continuous frames -41-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297)

方向;:連續圖案相似’雖然在各個方向,除至少-個 小偏差卻以續=較佳’但偏離此種絕對連續性之微 &amp; π1 终,祇要此等偏差不明顯影響偏向構件的性 2可。在包含實質半連續框構之層中,導管部份—般包 2連續偏向導管H可在平行於χ·γ平面 續偏向導管Γ僅在=續性之偏向導管。當然 性。 僅在千仃於Χ-Υ平面之一個方向具有連續 眾多獨立突出物,,一詞係指一層包含獨立且相互分開之 突出物〈框構2〇 ;涿等突出物在平行於χ·γ平面之各個方 向白不連續。包含眾多突出物之框構2〇清楚顯示於圖I?, 其中第一層30及第二層40各包含眾多突出物;圖13及 15,其中僅第一層3〇包含眾多突出物;及圖π&quot;,其中 僅第二層40包含眾多突出物。若個別層係由眾多獨立突出 物所形成,則此層之導管部份可視爲包含獨立突出物之一 連續偏向導管。如此處所用,&quot;導管部份,,及”至少_偏向導 管’’任一詞一般係描述全部之各種偏向導管;獨立偏向導 管、連續偏向導管及半連續偏向導管,除非另有註明。 關於表面’則與整個框構相反,&quot;實質連續”表面係指框 構20之一表面(不論是紙匹面21或背面22之表面),其中五 人無法藉不中斷線在整個線長度整個通過該表面之上連^ 位於該表面上之任何二點;及”實質半連續”表面係指框構 2 0之一表面,其在平行於χ-γ平面之各個方向,除至少— 個方向外,都具有”實質連績性”且在該表面上吾人無法藉 42- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 裝 訂 559632Orientation ;: continuous patterns are similar 'although in all directions, except for at least one small deviation, it is continued = better', but the deviation from this absolute continuity is small & π1, as long as these deviations do not significantly affect the characteristics of the biased members 2 OK. In the layer containing a substantially semi-continuous frame, the catheter part—the general package 2—continuously deflects the catheter H and can continue to deflect the catheter parallel to the χ · γ plane, and only deviates to the catheter. Of course sex. There are many continuous independent protrusions only in the direction of the plane of the X-Υ plane. The term refers to a layer containing independent and separated protrusions <frame structure 20; 涿 and other protrusions are parallel to the χ · γ plane. The directions are not continuous in all directions. The frame structure 20 including a plurality of protrusions is clearly shown in FIG. 1 ?, wherein the first layer 30 and the second layer 40 each include a plurality of protrusions; FIGS. 13 and 15, wherein only the first layer 30 includes a plurality of protrusions; and Figure π &quot;, where only the second layer 40 contains numerous protrusions. If an individual layer is formed by a plurality of independent protrusions, the catheter portion of this layer can be regarded as a continuous deflection of the catheter containing one of the independent protrusions. As used herein, &quot; catheter section, and any of the words "at least _biased catheter" generally describe all of the various deflected catheters; independent deflected catheters, continuous deflected catheters, and semi-continuous deflected catheters, unless otherwise noted. About "Surface" is the opposite of the entire frame structure. "Substantially continuous" surface refers to one surface of the frame structure 20 (whether the surface of the paper surface 21 or the back surface 22). Five of them cannot borrow the uninterrupted line over the entire length of the line. The entire surface is continuously connected at any two points on the surface; and the "substantially semi-continuous" surface refers to a surface of the frame 20, which is in all directions parallel to the χ-γ plane, except for at least one Outside the direction, they all have "substantially continuous performance" and on this surface I cannot borrow 42- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) binding 559632

不中斷線在整個線長度整個通過該表面之上連接位於該表 面上之任何二點。 應注意的是,本發明涵蓋偏向構件,其中層3〇、4〇中至 少一層包含連續圖案、半連續圖案及包含眾多獨立突出物 圖案之任何組合。例如,第一層可包含半連續圖案及眾多 獨互突出物之組合(未示出),或連續圖案及配置於例如連 續圖案之獨立偏向導管中之組合(未示出)。框構20及偏向 導管之幾何形狀不必類似或在任何一定層内重複。 根據本發明,偏向構件10之多層結構之每一層可具有比 所 #•開放區域(specific resulting open area)R。如此處所 用,”比所得開放區域,,(R)係意指一定單位之層表面積(A) 之全部偏向導管之累計突出開放區域(2R)對此一單位之 一定表面積(A)之比,亦即2 R/A,其中每一個別導管 之突出開放區域係由此一導管在平行於χ_γ平面之平面所 測ί于之最小突出開放區域所形成。此比開放區域可用分數 或百分比表示。例如,若一假設層在整個三萬平方毫米之 單位表面積(Α)内分散二千個個別偏向導管且每一偏向導 管具有突出開放面積五平方毫米,則全部二千個個別偏向 導管之累計突出開放區域(2R)爲一萬平方毫米(5平方毫 米X 2,000 = 10,000平方毫米),而此種假設層之比所得開放 區域爲R= 1/3或33.33 %( 1〇,〇〇〇平方毫米除以三萬平方毫 米)。在雙層偏向構件10中,如此處所舉例,第一層3〇可 具有第一比所得開放區域R1,及第二層40可具有第二比所 得開放區域R2。 -43- 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 參 裝 訂The uninterrupted line passes through the surface over the entire length of the line and connects any two points on the surface. It should be noted that the present invention encompasses a biasing member in which at least one of layers 30, 40 includes a continuous pattern, a semi-continuous pattern, and any combination of a plurality of independent protrusion patterns. For example, the first layer may comprise a combination (not shown) of a semi-continuous pattern and a number of unique mutually protruding features, or a combination (not shown) of a continuous pattern and an independent biasing duct arranged in, for example, a continuous pattern. The geometry of the frame 20 and the deflection duct need not be similar or repeated within any given layer. According to the present invention, each layer of the multilayer structure of the biasing member 10 may have a specific resulting open area R. As used herein, "ratio than the resulting open area, (R) means the ratio of the total projected open area (2R) of a certain unit of layer surface area (A) deflected towards the catheter to the unit surface area (A) of a unit, That is, 2 R / A, in which the protruding open area of each individual duct is formed by the smallest protruding open area measured by a catheter in a plane parallel to the χ_γ plane. This ratio open area can be expressed as a fraction or a percentage. For example, if a hypothetical layer disperses 2,000 individual deflection ducts throughout a unit surface area (A) of 30,000 square millimeters and each deflection duct has a projected open area of five square millimeters, the cumulative protrusion of all two thousand individual deflection ducts The open area (2R) is 10,000 square millimeters (5 square millimeters X 2,000 = 10,000 square millimeters), and the ratio of this hypothetical layer to the open area is R = 1/3 or 33.33% (10,000 square millimeters) (Divided by 30,000 square millimeters). In the double-layer deflection member 10, as exemplified here, the first layer 30 may have a first ratio obtained open area R1, and the second layer 40 may have a second ratio obtained open Area R2. -43- This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm).

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(41 ) 每一個別導管之累計突出開放區域係根據其平行於χ-γ 平面之最小突出開放區域測量,因爲有些偏向導管在其整 個長度或層之厚度一亦即,分別自層30或40之上表面31或 41分別至底表面32或42,也許不均勻。例如,有些偏向 導管35、45可爲錐形,亦即,其上表面小孔大於或小於底 表面小孔(見,例如圖2 ),如概括讓與之美國專利第 5,900,122及5,948,210號所述,彼等揭示内容併於此以供參 考。在其他具體例中,個別導管(3 5、4 5 )之最小開放區域 可位於層(分別爲30、40)之上表面(31、41)與底表面 (3 2、4 2 )中間。 在各個個別層3 0、4 0中,個別層之比所得開放區域可爲 至少1 / 5 (或2 0 % ),更特別爲至少2 / 5 (或4 0 % )而再更特別 爲3/5(或60%)。根據本發明,第一比所得開放區域ri可 大於、實質等於或小於第二所得開放區域R 2。 在本發明之一些具體例中,第一層30可具有不同於第二 層40之第二可變形性D2之第一可變形性D1。如此處所 用,”可變形性”係意指層在施加外力或壓力下,一般在偏 向構件10壓在壓緊表面如楊基烘罐上時,改變其形狀而仍 充分保留其體積之能力。圖48及49顯示偏向構件1〇之具 體例,其中第一層30之第一可變形性D1大於第二層40之 第二可變形性D2。在圖48中,偏向構件1〇顯示未受.壓 力。在圖49中,偏向構件10則顯示在施加實質平行於ζ -方 向,亦即,實質垂直於偏向構件1〇之一般平面之壓力下。 在壓力下,第一層30具有相對較大可變形性之部份會減小 -44- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (41) The cumulative protruding open area of each individual catheter is measured according to its smallest protruding open area parallel to the χ-γ plane, because some deflection catheters have their entire length or thickness It may be uneven from the upper surface 31 or 41 of the layer 30 or 40 to the bottom surface 32 or 42 respectively. For example, some deflection catheters 35, 45 may be tapered, that is, the small holes on the upper surface are larger or smaller than the small holes on the bottom surface (see, for example, FIG. 2), as described in US Pat. , They disclose the content and hereby for reference. In other specific examples, the smallest open area of the individual ducts (35, 4 5) may be located between the upper surface (31, 41) and the bottom surface (3 2, 4 2) of the layer (30, 40), respectively. In each individual layer 30, 40, the open area obtained by the ratio of the individual layers may be at least 1/5 (or 20%), more particularly at least 2/5 (or 40%) and even more particularly 3 / 5 (or 60%). According to the present invention, the first obtained open area ri may be larger than, substantially equal to, or smaller than the second obtained open area R 2. In some embodiments of the present invention, the first layer 30 may have a first deformability D1 different from the second deformability D2 of the second layer 40. As used herein, "deformability" means the ability of a layer to change its shape while still retaining its volume sufficiently when the biasing member 10 is pressed against a pressing surface, such as a Yankee oven, under an external force or pressure. 48 and 49 show specific examples of the biasing member 10, in which the first deformability D1 of the first layer 30 is greater than the second deformability D2 of the second layer 40. In Fig. 48, the deflection member 10 shows that no pressure is applied. In Fig. 49, the deflection member 10 is shown under the application of a pressure substantially parallel to the z-direction, that is, substantially normal to the general plane of the deflection member 10. Under pressure, the relatively deformable part of the first layer 30 will be reduced -44- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) 559632 A7

發明説明 其厚度同時橫向(亦即,平行於χ-γ平面之方向)擴大。同 時’具有相對較小可變形性之第二層40幾乎不改變其厚度 (或相對於第—層改變至較小程度)。第二層40與第一層3〇 直接並置之一些部份可在Ζ -方向壓力下偏向進入第一層30 中。第二層40之—些懸吊部份49可偏向進入第一層30之 偏向導管3 5中’因而進一步使配置於其中的纖維結構5〇〇 t部份選擇地緻密化。(爲清晰起見,圖48及49未顯示纖 維結構)。 本發明涵蓋至少一層可包含彈性材料。而且,一層之彈 性旎或彈性可與其他層不同。如此處所用,”彈性能&quot;或&quot;彈 性”等詞係意指變形(扭變或壓縮)層在變形力量移除後自動 男貧恢復其尺寸及形狀之能力。更明確言之,彈性可變形 層在變形力量移除後幾乎立即可恢復其原來未約制之厚 度。最明確言之,在製造本發明纖維結構500之連續方法 之情形時’此種回復性應在連續方法之重複週期中在施加 下一變形力量之前發生。彈性材料之實例包括,但不限 於:矽橡膠、胺基甲酸酯橡膠、苯乙晞-丁二烯橡膠、天然 橡膠、合成橡膠及其任何組合。 本發明也涵蓋層30、40至少一層可包含可壓縮材料。如 此處所用,,,可壓縮性,,係意指一種材料在施加外力下縮小 其體積之能力。例如,可壓縮層可在施加壓力下縮小其厚 度而不在橫向方向明顯擴大。也爲彈性的可壓縮材料可自 其自由未受約制之厚度壓縮(如藉z_方向壓縮力)至其縮小 厚度。在維持材料於壓縮型態之力量消除後,該材料即可 -45- 559632DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The thickness is simultaneously enlarged laterally (that is, in a direction parallel to the χ-γ plane). At the same time, the second layer 40 having relatively small deformability hardly changes its thickness (or to a lesser extent than the first layer). Some parts of the second layer 40 directly juxtaposed with the first layer 30 can be biased into the first layer 30 under the Z-direction pressure. Some of the hanging portions 49 of the second layer 40 can be biased into the deflection ducts 35 of the first layer 30, thereby further densifying the 500 t portion of the fibrous structure disposed therein. (For clarity, Figures 48 and 49 do not show the fiber structure). The invention encompasses that at least one layer may include an elastic material. Moreover, the elasticity or elasticity of one layer may differ from the other layers. As used herein, the term "elasticity" or "elasticity" means the ability of a deforming (torsional or compressive) layer to automatically recover its size and shape after the deformation force is removed. More specifically, the elastically deformable layer can recover its original unrestricted thickness almost immediately after the deformation force is removed. To be clear, in the case of a continuous method of fabricating the fibrous structure 500 of the present invention 'this recovery should occur in the repeating cycle of the continuous method before the next deformation force is applied. Examples of elastic materials include, but are not limited to: silicone rubber, urethane rubber, styrene-butadiene rubber, natural rubber, synthetic rubber, and any combination thereof. The invention also encompasses that at least one of the layers 30, 40 may comprise a compressible material. As used herein, compressibility, means the ability of a material to reduce its volume under an external force. For example, a compressible layer can be reduced in thickness under pressure without significantly expanding in the lateral direction. A compressible material that is also elastic can be compressed from its free, unconstrained thickness (eg, by a z-direction compression force) to its reduced thickness. After the power to maintain the material in the compressed form is eliminated, the material is fine -45- 559632

擴大回復至實質等於其自由未受約制之厚度或其至少約 9 5%:厚度。就其中利用本發明偏向構件⑺之連續造紙方 法而言,此種未受約制厚度之回復應在施加下一壓縮力前 發生。可壓縮材料之實例包括,但不限於,任何適當構造 之開及閉細孔(open and cl〇sed cell)發泡體,其中一些可與 適當樹脂ί昆合。 製造偏向構件之方法 根據本發明一具髏例之製造偏向構件i 〇之方法一般包含 形成至少二層30、4〇,每層各有其本身結構,然後將第二 層30、40以相互面對面關接合在一起,使得一層之一部份 在Z-方向對應於另一層之偏向導管,因而形成懸吊部份 49。層30、40各可具有其本身之偏向導管部份圖案。此 一製造本發明偏向構件丨〇之方法之具體例將更明確參照圖 1 9 - 2 1加以說明。 在圖19中,框構2〇之第一層30係利用第一成形表面1〇〇 形成’而第二層40則係利用第二成形表面200形成。如此 處所用’ ”成形表面”係意指建構及配置成可支撑適當可硬 化材料如液體光敏樹脂塗層之成形裝置之表面。可硬化材 料可直接沉積於成形表面上,或可沉積於爲蓋住成形表面 以防其受液體可硬化材料污染而提供之背膜上。在圖1 9所 示具體例中,包含例如液體光敏樹脂之第一可硬化材料 300係沉積在第一背膜13〇蓋住的第一成形表面1〇〇上;而 第二可硬化材料400則係沉積在第二背膜230蓋住的第二成 形表面200上。成形表面10〇、2〇〇係由分別包含第一圓筒 -46- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 五 發明説明(44 ) 101及第二圓筒201之第一及第二成形單元所形成。在圖19 所示連續方法之具體例中,圓筒1〇1及2〇1係相互轉動,其 中第一圓筒1 〇 1以順時針方向轉動。然而,應注意的是, 成形表面1〇〇、200中至少一表面可包含非圓形或非曲線元 件’亦即,成形表面100、200之一或二者可爲平坦或平 面,或如有必要,具有其他適當構型。 若有需要,成形表面可包含可變形表面,如概括讓與之 美國專利第5,275,700號所述,其揭示内容併於此以供參 考。當補強元件50在製造例如第一層30之過程中壓入可變 形成形表面時,可變形成形表面即形成自某些區域排除可 硬化材料之突出物,其在硬化時將處於框構2〇之背面22。 這會引起偏向構件1 〇形成所謂”粗縫,,(texture(j )背面2 2, 其中有提供組織不規則性之通路。這些組織不規則性在某 些偏向構件1 〇之具體例很有利,因爲彼等會防止眞空封在 偏向構件1 0之背面與造紙設備之表面(如眞空箱之表面或 拾取鞋之表面)之間形成,因而在其間產生”漏泄&quot;(leakage) 而因此可減輕在製造本發明纖維結構500之通風乾燥過程 中所施加眞空壓力之非所欲後果。產生此種漏泄的其他方 法已揭示於概括讓與之美國專利第5 718 8〇6、5,741,402、 5,744,007、5,776,3 1 1及5,885,421號中,彼等揭示内容均併 於此以供參考。 漏泄也了利用所明的差別透光技術”(心打eren^iai Hght transmission techniques ”)產生,如概括讓與之美國專利第 5,624,790、5,554,467、5,529,664、5,514,523 及 5,334,289 -47- 本纸浪尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 _____B7 &quot;X、發明説明(45~Γ &quot; — 號中,彼等揭示内容均併於此以供參考。偏向構件係藉施 加光敏樹脂塗層於其不透明部份之補強元件,然後使塗層 透過具有透明及不透明區域之掩模並同時透過補強元件曝 露於活化波長之光下而製成。 產生背面表面不規則性之另一方式包含利用粗糙成形表 面或粗糙障壁膜,如概括讓與之美國專利第5,364,504、 5,260,171及5,098,522號所示,彼等揭示内容均併於此以供 參考。偏向構件係藉在補強元件前進通過粗糙表面上時將 光敏樹脂澆鑄於補強元件上並使其通過補強元件,然後使 塗層透過具有透明及不透明區域之掩模曝露於活化波長之 光下而製成。 如圖19所示,第一及第二背膜13〇、23〇係爲分別保護第 一及第二成形表面1〇〇、2〇〇並促進部份完成層3 〇、4〇分別 自成形表面100、200移除而提供。在圖【9之連續方法中, 背膜130、230係分別在方向箭頭D3、〇4所示方向前進。 在圖19之具體例中以實例言之,第一背膜13〇顯示爲單次 用膜(single-use film),其係由供應捲131a供應、捲繞成捲 取捲131b且一般在使用後丟棄;而第二背膜23〇則顯示爲 包含繞回送輥231前進並在清潔站232清淨及再用之無端 帶0 爲閲讀者方便,建構個別層3〇、4〇之方法將在此處有關 製造第一層30中討論。應了解的是,在圖19之具體例中, 建構第二層40之方法與第—層30者相似,其一些可能差異 將在以下明確解說。 -48-Enlarge the reply to a thickness that is substantially equal to its free unrestricted or at least about 9 5%: thickness. In the case of a continuous papermaking method in which the biasing member ⑺ of the present invention is used, such unrestricted thickness recovery should occur before the next compressive force is applied. Examples of compressible materials include, but are not limited to, any suitably constructed open and closed cell foam, some of which may be combined with a suitable resin. Method for manufacturing a biased member A method of manufacturing a biased member i 0 according to a cross-section of the present invention generally includes forming at least two layers 30, 40, each having its own structure, and then placing the second layers 30, 40 to face each other The hinges are joined together so that one part of one layer corresponds to the deflection duct of the other layer in the Z-direction, thereby forming a suspension portion 49. The layers 30, 40 may each have their own pattern of biased duct portions. A specific example of the method for manufacturing the biasing member of the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 19, the first layer 30 of the frame 20 is formed using the first forming surface 100 'and the second layer 40 is formed using the second forming surface 200. As used herein, "" forming surface "means the surface of a forming device constructed and configured to support a suitable hardenable material such as a liquid photosensitive resin coating. The hardenable material may be deposited directly on the forming surface, or it may be deposited on a backing film provided to cover the forming surface from contamination by the liquid hardenable material. In the specific example shown in FIG. 19, a first hardenable material 300 containing, for example, a liquid photosensitive resin is deposited on a first forming surface 100 covered by a first back film 13; and a second hardenable material 400 It is deposited on the second forming surface 200 covered by the second back film 230. The forming surfaces 100 and 200 are made up of the first cylinder -46, respectively. This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 Five invention descriptions (44) 101 and second The first and second forming units of the cylinder 201 are formed. In the specific example of the continuous method shown in FIG. 19, the cylinders 101 and 201 are rotated with respect to each other, and the first cylinder 101 is rotated in a clockwise direction. However, it should be noted that at least one of the shaped surfaces 100, 200 may include non-circular or non-curved elements, that is, one or both of the shaped surfaces 100, 200 may be flat or planar, or if there is Necessary, with other appropriate configurations. If desired, the shaped surface may include a deformable surface, as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,275,700, generally assigned, which disclosure is hereby incorporated by reference. When the reinforcing element 50 is pressed into the variable shape surface during the manufacture of, for example, the first layer 30, the variable shape surface forms a protrusion that excludes the hardenable material from some areas, which will be in the frame 2 when hardened. Of the back 22. This will cause the biasing member 10 to form a so-called "thick seam," (texture (j) on the back 22, which has a path to provide organizational irregularities. These organizational irregularities are advantageous in some specific examples of the biasing member 10, Because they prevent the formation of empty seals between the back surface of the deflection member 10 and the surface of the papermaking equipment (such as the surface of empty boxes or the surface of picking shoes), a "leakage" is generated in the meantime and can be reduced. The unintended consequence of the air pressure applied during the air-drying process of manufacturing the fiber structure 500 of the present invention. Other methods of producing such leaks have been disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,718,806, 5,741,402, 5,744,007, which are generally assigned to them , 5,776,3 1 1 and 5,885,421, their disclosures are hereby incorporated by reference. Leaks have also been generated using the known difference in light transmission technology "(心 打 eren ^ iai Hght transmission techniques"), as summarized Assigned to U.S. Patent Nos. 5,624,790, 5,554,467, 5,529,664, 5,514,523, and 5,334,289 -47- This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 _____B7 &quot; X, invention description (45 ~ Γ &quot; — No., their disclosures are hereby incorporated by reference. The biasing member is a reinforcing element by applying a photosensitive resin coating on its opaque part, and then coating The layer is made through a mask with transparent and opaque areas and at the same time exposed to light of an activating wavelength through a reinforcing element. Another way to create irregularities on the back surface involves the use of rough formed surfaces or rough barrier films, such as U.S. Patent Nos. 5,364,504, 5,260,171, and 5,098,522, and their disclosures are hereby incorporated by reference. The biasing member is formed by casting a photosensitive resin on the reinforcing element and advancing the reinforcing element as it advances through a rough surface. It is made by reinforcing elements, and then exposing the coating to light with an activating wavelength through a mask having transparent and opaque areas. As shown in FIG. 19, the first and second back films 13 and 23 are respectively It is provided to protect the first and second forming surfaces 100, 200 and to facilitate the partial completion of the layers 30 and 40 to be removed from the forming surfaces 100 and 200, respectively. In the method, the back films 130 and 230 are respectively advanced in the directions shown by the directional arrows D3 and 〇4. In the specific example of FIG. 19, by way of example, the first back film 13 is shown as a single-use film (single-use film). film), which is supplied by the supply roll 131a, is wound into a take-up roll 131b, and is generally discarded after use; and the second back film 23 is shown to include the rewinding roll 231, which is cleaned and reused at the cleaning station 232 The endless band 0 is convenient for the reader. The method of constructing the individual layers 30 and 40 will be discussed here in the first layer 30. It should be understood that, in the specific example of FIG. 19, the method of constructing the second layer 40 is similar to that of the first layer 30, and some possible differences will be clearly explained below. -48-

559632 五、發明説明(46 在圖19所示之具體例中,形成第一層3〇之方法包含以下 步驟。若偏向構件10欲具有補強構件,則提供第一補強構 件50二如上解釋,第一補強元件5〇具有上面”及下面 52第補強元件50係由第一成形表面1〇〇支撑,使得第 一補強元件50之下面52面向第一成形表面1〇〇且可與其接 觸或與第一背膜130接觸若利用此種背膜時,如上解釋。 第一補強元件50—般但非必要與第一背膜13〇直接接觸。 在圖1 9所I連續方法中,第一補強元件5 〇係自供應捲 5 0a供應。也包括在本發明内的是,第一補強元件可以無 端帶t形式供應,如概括讓與之美國專利第4,514,345號所 示,其揭示内容併於此以供參考。在圖19中,第一補強元 件5 0係在第一機器方向md 1前進。 此處所用”機器方向” 一詞與造紙上傳統所用該詞同義, 其中此一詞係指平行於紙匹流動通過造紙設備之方向。就 製造偏向構件1 〇之連續方法而言,,,機器方向,,係在本發明 方法中平行於可硬化材料之塗層流動之方向。應了解的 是’機器方向係一相對名詞,係就塗層在方法中之特定點 之運動而言。因此,機器方向在本發明之一定方法中可(而 一般會)改變若干次。,,第一機器方向,,MD1及,,第二機器方 向” MD2係指分別在製造中之第一及第二層3 〇、* 〇,如熟 諳本技術者將輕易了解。”機器橫向,,一詞則係垂直於機器 方向之方向且平行於建構中偏向構件1〇之一般平面,或X-Y平面。 第一可硬化材料300如例如液體光敏樹脂材料之塗層係施 -49 本紙張尺度適财S ®家標準(CNS) Μ規格(21QX 297公爱) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(47 ) 加至第一補強元件50,而明確言之,至其上面51。可施塗 液體可硬化材料至補強元件5 0之任何技術皆適合。例如, 可使用圖1 9概略所示之噴嘴160。一般而言,第一可硬化 材料300應均勻施塗於第一補強元件5 0或其部份之整個寬 度。補強元件50之寬度及成形表面100之寬度係在機器橫 向延伸。若第一補強元件5 0具有設計及建構成可被第一可 硬化材料300穿透之空隙,例如,包含眾多交織紗線之補 強元件(圖1 - 9及1 1 - 1 8所示),可硬化材料即應如此施加以 使得充分量之可硬化材料可填滿第一補強元件5 0以獲得兩 者間之牢固結合。 可用於製造第一及第二層30、40中任一層或二層之適當 可硬化材料可自許多市售者輕易選出。例如,可硬化材料 可包含液體光敏樹脂,如在適當輻射,一般爲紫外(UV)光 之影響下可硬化或交聯之聚合物。收集有關液體光敏樹脂 更多資訊之參考資料包括Green等人之” Photocross-linkable Resin Systems,”J. Macro-Sci. Revs. Macro Chem·,C21(2), 187-273(1981-82) ; Bayer之” A Review of Ultraviolet Curing Technology,&quot;Tappi Paper Synthetics Conf. Proc·,1987 年 9 月 25 -27 日,pp. 167-172 ;及 Schmidle 之 ” Ultraviolet Curable Flexible Coatings,”J. of Coated Fabrics,8,10-20 (1978 年 7 月)。適當液體光敏樹脂之實例包括於MacDermid GRAPHIC ARTS 公司(Wilmington,Del)製造之 Merigraph 系 列樹脂中。 下一步驟係視需要而定且包含將塗層之厚度控制在預選 -50- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家橾準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7559632 V. Description of the invention (46 In the specific example shown in FIG. 19, the method of forming the first layer 30 includes the following steps. If the biasing member 10 wants to have a reinforcing member, the first reinforcing member 50 is provided as explained above. A reinforcing element 50 has an upper surface "and a lower surface 52. The first reinforcing element 50 is supported by the first forming surface 100, so that the lower surface 52 of the first reinforcing element 50 faces the first forming surface 100 and can be in contact with it or with the first When a back film 130 contacts such a back film, it is explained as above. The first reinforcing element 50 is generally but not necessarily in direct contact with the first back film 130. In the continuous method shown in FIG. 19, the first reinforcing element 50 is supplied from the supply roll 50a. Also included in the present invention is that the first reinforcing element may be supplied in the form of an endless belt t, as shown in US Pat. No. 4,514,345, which is generally assigned to it, and its disclosure is hereby used as For reference. In FIG. 19, the first reinforcing element 50 is advanced in the first machine direction md 1. The term "machine direction" used here is synonymous with the word traditionally used in papermaking, where the term means parallel to Paper flow through The direction of the paper machine. For the continuous method of manufacturing the deflection member 10, the machine direction is the direction parallel to the flow of the coating of the hardenable material in the method of the present invention. It should be understood that the 'machine direction is a The relative term refers to the movement of the coating at a specific point in the method. Therefore, the machine direction can (and generally will) change several times in a certain method of the present invention. ,, the first machine direction, MD1, and, "Second machine direction" MD2 refers to the first and second layers 3 〇, * 〇 in the manufacturing, respectively, as those skilled in the art will easily understand. "Machine transverse", the term is the direction perpendicular to the machine direction It is parallel to the general plane or XY plane of the deflection member 10 during construction. The first hardenable material 300, such as the coating of a liquid photosensitive resin material, is applied to the paper. (21QX 297 public love) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (47) Add to the first reinforcing element 50, and specifically, to the top 51. Any technique that can apply liquid hardenable material to the reinforcing element 50 Suitable for. For example, the nozzle 160 shown in Fig. 19 can be used. In general, the first hardenable material 300 should be uniformly applied to the entire width of the first reinforcing element 50 or a part thereof. The width and shape of the reinforcing element 50 The width of the surface 100 extends in the transverse direction of the machine. If the first reinforcing element 50 has a gap that is designed and constructed to be penetrated by the first hardenable material 300, for example, a reinforcing element containing a large number of interwoven yarns (Figures 1-9 And 1 1-18), the hardenable material should be applied so that a sufficient amount of hardenable material can fill the first reinforcing element 50 to obtain a strong bond between the two. It can be used to manufacture the first and the second Any one of the two layers 30, 40 or a suitable hardenable material of two layers can be easily selected from many commercial vendors. For example, the hardenable material may comprise a liquid photosensitive resin, such as a polymer that is hardenable or crosslinkable under the influence of appropriate radiation, typically ultraviolet (UV) light. References that gather more information about liquid photosensitive resins include "Photocross-linkable Resin Systems," by Green et al., "J. Macro-Sci. Revs. Macro Chem ·, C21 (2), 187-273 (1981-82); "A Review of Ultraviolet Curing Technology by Bayer", "Tappi Paper Synthetics Conf. Proc.", September 25-27, 1987, pp. 167-172; and Schmidle by "Ultraviolet Curable Flexible Coatings", "J. of Coated Fabrics" 8,10-20 (July 1978). Examples of suitable liquid photosensitive resins are included in the Merigraph series of resins manufactured by MacDermid GRAPHIC ARTS Company (Wilmington, Del). The next step is as needed and includes coating the coating The thickness is controlled in the pre-selected -50- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7

::在有些具體例中,此_預選値係受第一層⑽期望厚 :所2且將影響所得偏向構件1〇之厚度。在其他具體例 L j厚度知交成所得偏向構件10之厚度…若偏向構 件10包含早層。此所得偏向構件1〇之厚度主要係受偏向構 件lot預定用途所支配。例如,當偏向構件1〇欲用於製造 以I所述纖維結構之方法中時,偏向構件i 0 一般係自約 0·〇毫米至約1〇·〇毫米厚。當然,其他用途會要求更厚之偏 向構件,其可高達30·〇毫米厚或甚至更厚,這些全部包括 在本發明4範圍内。用於控制第一層3〇之厚度之任何適當 裝置白可用於本方法。例如,圖丨9中所示爲輥丨丨h之使 用。輥111a與成形表面1〇〇間,更特別的,輥ma與背膜 130間的間隙可藉任何習知裝置(未示出)用人工或機械控 制。 掩模 下一步驟包含提供掩模n〇及將掩模11()固定於第一可硬 化材料300之塗層與硬化輻射12〇之來源中間。在光敏樹脂 之情形時’硬化輻射12〇之來源可包含例如汞弧燈。概略 顯示於圖19-25A之掩模11〇包含相當薄且可撓結構,一般 爲薄膜性質’具有上面110a及與上面11〇a相反之底面 110b。在一些具體例中,掩模丨1〇可和塗層以接觸關係並 置。如圖20概略所述,掩模110包含透明區域112及不透明 區域114。如此處所用,”不透明度”及”不透明”係意指在 掩模110之某些區域中缺乏透明度或半透明度,且代表作 成陰影之區域不透或部份不透硬化輻射射線之品質。 -51 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐):: In some specific examples, this _ preselection is based on the expected thickness of the first layer: 2 and will affect the thickness of the resulting biasing member 10. In other specific examples, the thickness of the deflection member 10 obtained by intersecting the thickness Lj is known. If the deflection member 10 includes an early layer. The thickness of the obtained deflection member 10 is mainly determined by the intended use of the deflection member lot. For example, when the deflection member 10 is to be used in a method for manufacturing the fibrous structure described in I, the deflection member i 0 is generally from about 0.0 mm to about 10.0 mm thick. Of course, other applications may require thicker deflection members, which may be as thick as 30 mm or even thicker, all of which are included in the scope of the present invention. Any suitable device for controlling the thickness of the first layer 30 can be used in this method. For example, Figure 9 illustrates the use of rollers. The gap between the roll 111a and the forming surface 100, and more specifically, the gap between the roll ma and the back film 130 can be controlled manually or mechanically by any conventional device (not shown). Masking The next step includes providing a mask no and fixing the mask 11 () between the coating of the first hardenable material 300 and the source of hardening radiation 12o. In the case of the photosensitive resin, the source of the 'hardening radiation 12o may include, for example, a mercury arc lamp. Outline The mask 11 shown in Figs. 19-25A contains a relatively thin and flexible structure, generally of a thin film nature, having a top surface 110a and a bottom surface 110b opposite the top surface 110a. In some specific examples, the mask 110 may be juxtaposed with the coating layer in a contact relationship. As outlined in FIG. 20, the mask 110 includes a transparent region 112 and an opaque region 114. As used herein, "opacity" and "opacity" mean the lack of transparency or translucency in certain areas of the mask 110, and represent the quality of the areas where the shadows are made opaque or partially opaque to the hardened radiation. -51-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

% 559632 A7 B7_______ 五、發明説明(49 ) 掩模110之主要目的是遮蔽塗層之某些區域’亦即,由不 透明區域114所遮蔽而不曝露於硬化輻射之區域。掩模110 之透明區域112容許塗層之其他(未遮蔽或部份遮蔽)區域曝 露並接受硬化輻射,其將造成這些未遮蔽部份固化’亦即 硬化。塗層被遮蔽之區域一般形成對應於建構中層之偏向 導管35所要圖案之預選圖案。具三維度結構之掩模也可用 於在塗層壓印圖案,如以下所述。 本發明之掩模110可具有多種差別不透明度’亦即’掩模 110可具有不同透明度之不透明區域114 °這些差別不透明 度可包含獨立不透明度及/或梯度不透明度。如此處所用, ,,梯度不透明度”係意指具有漸次改變之強度之不透明度。 漸次不透明度中並不具有分開一不透明度與另一透明度之 明確”界線”(border line)。亦即,梯度不透明度係非單色 調不透明度,其中在至少一方向之不透明度之變化係漸次 遞增,與獨立者相反。 一種建構具有差別不透明度之區域之掩模110之方法包含 印刷透明膜以形成具有某一初始不透明度之不透明區域之 圖案,然後印刷膜第二次以形成具有另一不透明度(與初始 不透明度不同)之不透明區域之圖案。例如,首先可用油墨 印刷膜以形成初始不透明度之區域,然後.再印刷以將油墨 施加至已具有初始不透明度之至少若干區域。在另一方法 中,差別不透明度可利用具有差別深度圖案以接受油墨之 印刷輥如凹版照相印刷輥以一步驟印刷形成。在印刷時, 沉積在透明膜上的油墨將具有差別強度之區域,反晚輕圖 -52- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 ----—---— 五、發明説明(50 ) 案之差別深度。形成不透明度區域之其他方法可用於本發 明。此等方法包括,但不限於,化學、電磁、雷射、熱等 等。 在圖22A-22C所示掩模之代表性具體例中,掩模11〇含 有具有第一不透明度之第一不透明區域114a及具較第一不 透明度低之第二透明度(在此又稱”部份不透明度”)之第二 不透明區域114b。”部份部透明”及”部份透明&quot;在此處可交 換使用。第一不透明區域114a及第二不透明區域114b各可 形成眾多獨立區域之不連續圖案(圖22A-22C)、半連續圖 案(未示出)或實質連續圖案(未示出)。第二不透明區域 114b可包含鄰近第一不透明區域U 4a之區域(圖22A-22C卜 掩模110可製成無端圈之形式(其全部細節並未顯示於圖 1 9,但熟諳本技術者應輕易明白),或可由供應捲(圖5 0) 供應至捲取捲(未示出)。如圖1 9及5 0所示,掩模11〇係在 方向箭頭D1所示之方向前進,在可使其與第一塗層300之 表面接觸之軋輥11 la下轉彎,再前進至掩模導輥111b,在 其附近可與第一塗層300脱離接觸。 掩模110可由可附有不透明及透明區域之任何適當材料製 成。可撓照相軟片本質之材料可適合。此種可撓軟片可包 含聚酯、聚丙烯、聚乙晞、纖維素、或任何其他適當材料 或其任何組合。不透明區域丨14可藉本技藝已知任何便利 裝置例如噴霧、照相、凹版照相印刷、膠片輪轉印刷或轉 動篩網印刷施加至掩模丨10。梯度不透明度可藉例如印刷 -53- A4規格(21〇Χ297公羡) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(51 ) 眾多漸增變化不透明度之線(其中總不透明度在至少一方向 漸次變化)或利用不同光學密度之油墨而形成。梯度不透明 度也可利用印刷輥…其具有接受油墨之圖案凹處漸次改變 之差別深度-·形成,該油墨在印刷時自輥轉移至軟片時將 具有反映輥圖案差別深度之不同強度之區域。二或多個掩 模--各具有其本身透明/不透明區域之圖案一重疊以形成具 有組合不透明區域之組合結構也涵蓋於本發明内。 概括讓與之專利申請案序號09/346,061,名稱爲 ’’Papermaking Belts Having Patterned Framework With Synclines Therein And Paper Made Therewith,”(7/1/99 以 Trokhan名義提出申請),併於此以供參考。此一申請案揭 示藉向斜層(synclines )中斷(在紙匹面)及細分之框構。框 構、向斜層及偏向導管分別賦予在帶之這些部份上製成之 紙之區域第一、第二及第三強度性質値。對應於向斜層之 紙區域之強度性質値係在對應於框構與偏向導管之紙區域 之強度性質値中間。例如,若帶作爲通風乾燥帶使用,則 對應於向斜層之紙區域之密度可小於對應於框構之紙區域 之密度但大於對應於偏向導管之紙區域之密度;若帶作爲 成形網使用,則對應於向斜層之紙區域之單位重量可大於 對應於框構之紙區域之單位重量但小於對.應於偏向導管之 紙區域之單位重量。 掩模110可利用光敏材料,如光敏膜製造,在此種情形 時,不透明區域可由使膜之預定區域選擇地曝露於光而產 生。Ozalid®或偶氮方法係用以自可變光學密度原件製造拷 -54- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 裝 訂% 559632 A7 B7_______ V. Description of the invention (49) The main purpose of the mask 110 is to shield certain areas of the coating layer, that is, the areas shielded by the opaque area 114 and not exposed to hardened radiation. The transparent area 112 of the mask 110 allows other (unshielded or partially shielded) areas of the coating to be exposed and to receive hardening radiation, which will cause these unshielded portions to cure ', that is, to harden. The area obscured by the coating generally forms a preselected pattern corresponding to the desired pattern of the deflection duct 35 for constructing the middle layer. Masks with a three-dimensional structure can also be used to imprint patterns on the coating, as described below. The mask 110 of the present invention may have a variety of different opacity ', that is, the mask 110 may have opaque regions of different transparency 114 °. These differential opacity may include independent opacity and / or gradient opacity. As used herein, "gradient opacity" means opacity with a gradually changing intensity. There is no clear "border line" in progressive opacity that separates one opacity from another. That is, Gradient opacity is non-monochromatic opacity, in which the change in opacity in at least one direction is gradually increasing, as opposed to being independent. A method of constructing a mask 110 having areas of differential opacity includes printing a transparent film to form a layer having A pattern of an opaque area of an initial opacity, and then printing the film a second time to form a pattern of an opaque area having another opacity (different from the initial opacity). For example, the film may be first printed with ink to form an Area, and then reprint to apply the ink to at least several areas that already have initial opacity. In another method, differential opacity can be achieved by using a printing roller, such as a gravure printing roller, with a differential depth pattern to accept the ink in one step Formed by printing. Oil deposited on transparent film during printing The areas with different strength will be lighter than later. Figure-52- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 ----——---- 5. Description of the invention ( 50) The depth of the difference. Other methods of forming opaque areas can be used in the present invention. These methods include, but are not limited to, chemical, electromagnetic, laser, thermal, etc. Representative of the masks shown in Figures 22A-22C In a specific example, the mask 110 includes a first opaque region 114a having a first opacity and a second opaque region having a second transparency that is lower than the first opacity (also referred to herein as "partial opacity"). 114b. "Partially transparent" and "Partially transparent" are used interchangeably here. Each of the first opaque region 114a and the second opaque region 114b may form a discontinuous pattern (FIGS. 22A-22C), a semi-continuous pattern (not shown), or a substantially continuous pattern (not shown) of a plurality of independent regions. The second opaque region 114b may include an area adjacent to the first opaque region U 4a (FIGS. 22A-22C and the mask 110 may be made in the form of an endless circle (its full details are not shown in FIG. 19, but those skilled in the art should (Easy to understand), or it can be supplied from the supply roll (Fig. 50) to the take-up roll (not shown). As shown in Figs. 19 and 50, the mask 11 is advanced in the direction shown by the direction arrow D1, The roller 11a which can be brought into contact with the surface of the first coating layer 300 is turned downward, and then advances to the mask guide roller 111b, which can be released from contact with the first coating layer 300 in the vicinity. The mask 110 may be opaque. And transparent areas made of any suitable material. The material of the flexible photographic film may be suitable. Such a flexible film may comprise polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, cellulose, or any other suitable material or any combination thereof. Opaque areas 14 can be applied to the mask by any convenient means known in the art such as spraying, photography, gravure printing, film rotary printing or rotary screen printing. 10. Gradient opacity can be obtained by, for example, printing-53- A4 size ( 21〇 × 297 public envy) 5596 32 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (51) Many lines of increasing opacity (where the total opacity gradually changes in at least one direction) or inks with different optical densities. Gradient opacity can also be achieved by printing rollers ... Differential depth- · formation that gradually changes the recess of the pattern receiving ink, the ink will have different intensity areas reflecting the different depth of the pattern of the roller when it is transferred from the roll to the film during printing. Two or more masks-each with It is also within the scope of the present invention to overlap the pattern of transparent / opaque areas to form a combined structure with combined opaque areas. The patent application serial number 09 / 346,061, which is generally assigned, is entitled `` Papermaking Belts Having Patterned Framework With Synclines Therein ''. And Paper Made Therewith, "(7/1/99 filed an application in the name of Trokhan), and is hereby incorporated by reference. This application reveals the framework of interruption (on the paper surface) and subdivision by synclines The frame, the oblique layer and the deflection duct give the areas of paper made on these parts of the belt first, second and Three strength properties: The strength properties of the paper area corresponding to the oblique layer are in the middle of the strength properties of the paper area corresponding to the frame and the deflection duct. For example, if the belt is used as a ventilated drying belt, it corresponds to the oblique direction. The density of the paper area of the layer can be less than the density of the paper area corresponding to the frame but greater than the density of the paper area corresponding to the deflection duct; if the belt is used as a forming net, the unit weight of the paper area corresponding to the oblique layer can be greater than Corresponds to the unit weight of the paper area of the frame but is less than that. It should correspond to the unit weight of the paper area biased to the duct. The mask 110 may be made of a photosensitive material such as a photosensitive film. In this case, the opaque area may be generated by selectively exposing a predetermined area of the film to light. Ozalid® or azo method is used to make copies from originals of variable optical density -54- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) binding

k 559632 A7 ___B7 五、發明説明(52 ) 貝。一般而言,拷貝在本質不是黑白便是灰色級。拷貝可 製造在不同基材上,但爲本發明之用,彼等可製造在以敏 化偶氮染料塗覆之透明聚酯膜上。含有所欲圖像之半透明 原件先和經塗覆之聚酯膜接觸。然後,使原件及拷貝曝露 於一般來自汞弧燈之紫外光下。光先通過半透明原件。拷 貝上之經敏化塗層係在膜曝露於光之區域被破壞,最後使 該些區域變透明。在原件圖像所遮蔽之區域中,敏化塗層 保持爲潛像。在原件與拷貝分離後,使拷貝曝露於氨氣 下。氨與剩下的偶氮染料反應並在膜上形成可見及基本上 永久圖像。拷貝上圖像之密度與原件上圖像之光學密度直 接成正比。此種膜適合用作爲光聚合方法之掩模。偶氮再 生設備通常由A · M. Bruning公司(Itasca,IL)出售。適當裝 置爲Bmning型750。類似設備則由Diazit公司(Y〇ungsviUe, NC.)出售。Diazit公司出售之適當裝置爲Executrac 〇 在一些具體例中’掩模110具有三維度外形。如此所用, 二維度外形係指掩模11 〇之Z -方向維度,該維度大於製 成掩模110之材料之厚度。例如,掩模i 1〇之三維度外形可 包含自掩模110 —般平面(當掩模110如置於平坦表面觀看 時)突出之突出物。這些突出物可自掩模11〇之上面n〇a, 底面110b或兩面1 l〇a、1 向外延伸(圖2 4及2 5 A),且可 具有規則/重複或不規則/不重複圖案。在圖2 4中,掩模之 底面11 Ob具有自其延伸之突出物115之圖案。當此種掩模 110固定在塗層附近時,突出物115之圖案即可壓印在塗層 中以在其中形成對應凹處圖案。圖25A顯示本發明之掩模 -55- 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公复) 559632 A7 ______B7 五、發明説明(53 ) 110,其包含二個突出物115圖案··一突出物115a圖案係自 上面110a延伸,而另一突出物115b圖案係自掩模11〇之底 面110b延伸。自掩模110上面延伸之突出物115a係中空並 形成空隙,流體可硬化材料可流入其中以在框構2 0之紙匹 面21形成對應突出物。 突出物115a、115b之圖案中任一個可和透明區域112及不 透明區域114之圖案相連合《因此,突出物U5a、115b之 圖案與不透明區域/透明區域114/112之圖案即可共同結合 而形成所欲偏向構件10之框構20之三維度圖案(圖25A), 不管掩模110是否具有自掩模上面ll〇a延伸之突出物ii5a 圖案、自掩模110底面11 Ob延伸之突出物115b圖案或兩突 出物115a、115b圖案。 突出物115可爲整體或附加。如此處所用,整體突出物係 自與掩模110同一或固有的材料所形成之突出物,而因此 該整體突出物並不能與掩模110其餘部份分離。一種在掩 模110形成整體突出物之方式已概略顯示於圖5〇。在圖5〇 中,掩模膜118係以供應捲之形式供應。掩模膜118係藉浮 花壓製輥190壓在支撑輥191上而壓製浮花。如圖5〇顯示, 不透明區域114可藉印刷不透明區域i 14之圖案同時譽製浮 花而產生。例如,可利用例如部份浸入其中盛有適當油墨 之油墨槽193中之油墨輥192,將油墨施加至浮花壓製輥 190,而更明確言之,施加至輥之浮花突出物之遠端表 面。也可將油墨噴至印刷輥192上,或直接噴在浮花壓製 輥190上(二種變化均未示出)。替代或除沉積適當油墨於浮 -56- 本紙張尺度制t ® S家標準(CNS) A视格(210 X 297公釐) ------- 559632k 559632 A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (52). Generally speaking, copies are either black and white or gray in nature. Copies can be made on different substrates, but for the purposes of the present invention, they can be made on a transparent polyester film coated with a sensitized azo dye. The translucent original containing the desired image is first brought into contact with the coated polyester film. The original and copies are then exposed to ultraviolet light, typically from a mercury arc lamp. Light passes through the translucent original. The sensitized coating on the copy was damaged in areas where the film was exposed to light, and finally made those areas transparent. In the area obscured by the original image, the sensitized coating remains as a latent image. After the original is separated from the copy, the copy is exposed to ammonia. Ammonia reacts with the remaining azo dyes and forms visible and substantially permanent images on the film. The density of the image on the copy is directly proportional to the optical density of the image on the original. This film is suitable as a mask for a photopolymerization method. Azo regeneration equipment is commonly sold by A.M. Bruning (Itasca, IL). A suitable device is a Bmning type 750. Similar equipment is sold by Diazit (YungsviUe, NC.). A suitable device sold by the company Diazit is Executiverac. In some specific examples, the 'mask 110 has a three-dimensional shape. As used herein, the two-dimensional profile refers to the Z-direction dimension of the mask 110, which is greater than the thickness of the material from which the mask 110 is made. For example, the three-dimensional shape of the mask i 10 may include protrusions protruding from the plane of the mask 110 (when the mask 110 is viewed on a flat surface). These protrusions may extend outward from the top of the mask 110, the bottom surface 110b, or both sides 110a, 1 (Figures 2 4 and 2 5 A), and may have regular / repeated or irregular / non-repeated pattern. In Fig. 24, the bottom surface 11 Ob of the mask has a pattern of protrusions 115 extending therefrom. When such a mask 110 is fixed near the coating, the pattern of the protrusions 115 can be embossed in the coating to form a corresponding recessed pattern therein. FIG. 25A shows the mask of the present invention-55- The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public copy) 559632 A7 ______B7 V. Description of the invention (53) 110, which includes two protrusions 115 Pattern ... The pattern of one protrusion 115a extends from the upper surface 110a, and the pattern of the other protrusion 115b extends from the bottom surface 110b of the mask 110. The protrusion 115a extending from the top of the mask 110 is hollow and forms a void, and a fluid hardenable material can flow thereinto to form a corresponding protrusion on the paper surface 21 of the frame 20. Any of the patterns of the protrusions 115a and 115b can be combined with the patterns of the transparent region 112 and the opaque region 114. Therefore, the patterns of the protrusions U5a and 115b and the pattern of the opaque region / transparent region 114/112 can be combined to form The desired three-dimensional pattern of the frame 20 of the member 10 (FIG. 25A), regardless of whether the mask 110 has a protrusion ii5a pattern extending from the top 110a of the mask, and a protrusion 115b extending from the bottom 11 Ob of the mask 110. Pattern or two protrusions 115a, 115b. The protrusion 115 may be integral or additional. As used herein, the integral protrusion is a protrusion formed from the same or inherent material as the mask 110, and therefore the integral protrusion cannot be separated from the rest of the mask 110. One way to form integral protrusions on the mask 110 is shown schematically in FIG. In FIG. 50, the mask film 118 is supplied in the form of a supply roll. The mask film 118 is pressed against the support roller 191 by a floating-pressing roll 190 to press the floating pattern. As shown in FIG. 50, the opaque area 114 can be generated by printing the pattern of the opaque area i 14 at the same time by making a floating flower. For example, an ink roller 192 such as partially immersed in an ink tank 193 containing an appropriate ink therein may be used to apply the ink to the embossed pressing roller 190, and more specifically, to the distal end of the embossed protrusion of the roller surface. It is also possible to spray the ink onto the printing roller 192, or directly onto the embossed pressing roller 190 (both variations are not shown). Substitute or eliminate the deposition of appropriate ink on the float -56- Paper size t ® S Standard (CNS) A viewing frame (210 X 297 mm) ------- 559632

花壓製輥190外,可在浮花壓.製步驟之後,例如利用接受 來自噴霧195 (如圖5 〇虛線概略所示)之油墨之輥i9〇a印刷 浮花壓製膜118。本技藝已知之其他方式如化學、電磁、 雷射、熱等等皆可另外或替代使用以在掩模110中產生不 透明區域。 在圖50中,當其上含有油墨之浮花壓製輥浮花壓製 膜118時,該輥即藉接觸將油墨以預定㈣,例如對應於 浮花壓製輥190上之浮花突出物之圖案,施加至膜118上。 當掩模11〇接觸可硬化材料之塗層3〇〇時,突出物ιΐ5之圖 案即在塗層300中產生對應之空隙,,負,,圖案。例如,掩模 11〇可如此印刷以使得突出物115之遠端表面充分不透明以 防止對應於不透明區域115之塗層區域硬化。因此,被遮 蔽照不到輻射而稍後洗除之液體樹脂之量,可在硬化步驟 之前,自塗層被遮蔽之部份除去一些樹脂而減少。結果, 藉由利用本發明之三維度掩模110,吾人即可節省=當量 的可硬化材料。 田 如此處所用,附加突出物係自非掩模110材料固有一部份 之材料形成的突出物。附加突出物可自掩模110獨立形 成。然而,並不排除自掩模110相同材料形成之附加突出 物115。附加突出物可附加(例如,藉黏合劑或化學方法)至 掩模110以和其形成整體結構。或者,附加突出物之圖案 可獨立供應並叠置於塗層3GG上,如圖51概略所示。附加 突出物可自各種適當材料製成,包括有機及非有機材料, 如但不限於,塑膠、樹脂、玻璃、木材、金屬、皮革紡 -57- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 ___ 五、發明説明(55 ) 織物及其任何組合。 在圖51中,三維度掩模11〇包含具有透明及不透明區域 之圖案之第一元件410及浮花壓製元件810。第一元件410 繞輥11 la、11 lb、11 lc及11 Id前進,而浮花壓製元件810 係自捲810a供應。第一元件410及浮花壓製元件810二者皆 可喂:入塗層300與軋辕111a所形成之鉗口中,在此處第一 元件410及浮花壓製元件810會合而形成複合結構,其中透 明及不透明區域112/114之圖案與突出物115之圖案共同結 合而形成偏向構件10框構20之所要三維度圖案。此一配置 咸信可在透明及不透明圖案112/114及突出物115圖案之控 制(及若必要,改變)上提供更大彈性。 圖5 2顯示此方法之又一具體例,其中掩模110係由至少 二獨立元件所形成。在圖52中,包含繞輥Ilia、111b、 111c及llld前進之無端透明膜之第一元件410及浮花壓製 元件810二者皆喂入塗層300與軋輥111a所形成之鉗口中。 圖52A中清楚顯示之浮花壓製元件810之一具體例包含本質 上爲可透氣網格之結構,其可由例如交織纖絲或模鍛、模 成形或本技藝已知任何其他方式形成。圖52A中所示之圖 案當然是一代表性具體例,而浮花壓製元件810可使用各 種其他適當圖案。 膜410及浮花壓製元件810在輥111a及111b間行進時,彼 等即形成複合掩模110,其中浮花壓製元件810在塗層300 中產生三維度圖案,而同時可遮蔽塗層300之選定區域不 被硬化輻射照到。透明膜410也可用以約束塗層300之區域 -58- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公爱) 559632 A7 _______ B7_ 五、發明説明(56 ) 不擴充超過浮花壓製元件810之外廓。若有需要,膜410也 可具有不透明區域之圖案以和浮花壓製元件810之圖案配 合。或者,浮花壓製元件810可爲透明或半透明,俾膜410 單獨形成不透明區域。 在圖51及52所示二具體例中,構成複合三維度掩模之二 個元件可在該元件41〇、81〇接觸前,利用例如黏合劑(圖 52中以實例顯示爲藉黏合劑塗敷器420噴在第一元件410) 或浮花壓製元件8 10或二者結合在一起,既使臨時結合。 這可防止浮花壓製元件810不當地沒入輥llla及lllb間的 塗層300中,或當浮花壓製元件81〇與第一元件410之間需 要對準時,與第一元件41〇對不準。 下一步驟包含使第一可硬化材料300透過掩模110曝露於 源120之硬化輻射下,藉以謗發未被第一不透明區域114a 完全遮蔽之區域,亦即,可透過掩模11〇之透明區域112或 部份透明區域(或部份不透明區域)接受硬化輻射之區域中 之塗層硬化。在圖1 9所示具體例中,背膜130、補強元件 50、第一可硬化材料3〇〇及第一掩模11〇全部形成一單元一 起自乳輥llla前行至掩模導輥lllb。在軋輥llla與掩模導 輕lllb中間,及在背膜130及補強元件50仍與第一成形表 面1〇〇並置之處,第一可硬化材料3〇〇即曝露在硬化輻射 120源所產生的硬化輻射下。若可硬化材料包含液體光敏 樹脂,一般即可選用曝光燈來提供主要在會引起液體光敏 樹脂硬化之波長内之照明。該波長係液體光敏樹脂之特 徵。任何適當照明源,如汞孤燈、脈動氙燈、無電極燈及 -59- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ____ B7 五、發明説明(57 ) 螢光燈皆可使用。硬化一般係以曝露區域中可硬化材料塗 層固化或半固化至塗層預定深度或厚度表現。相反地,未 曝露區域或硬化輻射所不及之部份則保持流體且可自塗層 移除。 輻射之強度及其照射時間係視曝露於輻射之區域所需要 的硬化程度而定。在光敏樹脂之情形時,曝露強度及時間 之絕對値係視樹脂之化學性質、其光特徵、所選圖案及塗 層之厚度或欲硬化之區域之所要深度而定。再者,硬化輻 射之曝露強度及入射角度對欲建構之框構預選圖案之壁中 有無錐形之存在有重要影響。概括讓與之美國專利第 5,962,860號(1999年1 0月5日以Trokhan等人名義頒予)併於 此以供參考。此一專利揭示一種用於產生控制之輕射以供 光敏樹脂硬化之裝置,其包含具有可調整以使硬化輻射實 質對向所要方向之眾多長形反射刻面之反射器。該專利進 一步揭示一種輻射管理裝置,其包含與輻射源並置、用以 控制硬化輻射之方法及強度之小型反射器。 下一步驟包含自半建構之第一層移除幾乎全部未硬化之 第一可硬化材料300。在圖1 9所示之具體例中,在掩模導 輥111b附近之處,掩模110及背膜130即和包含補強構件50 及半建構之第一層實體分離。該複合第一層前進到第一移 除鞋119附近,在此可對複合物施加眞空或其他方法,俾 相當量之仍然液體(未硬化)材料可自複合物移除。 第二層40可用幾乎相同之方法自第二可硬化材料400製 成。在一些具體例中,第二層40不具有永久結合於第二可 -60- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(58 ) 硬化材料400之補強元件。在製造第二層4〇之過程中,也 許宜使用第二補強元件60,特別是在第二層4〇包含半連續 圖案或眾多獨立突出物之圖案時。第二補強元件6〇可包含 臨時補強元件。如此處所用,”臨時補強元件”意指在建構 特定(第一或第二)層及/或結合第一及第二層之步驟時使 用’而在其完成其預定功用後移除,俾最後偏向構件不擁 有它之補強元件。臨時補強元件可由任何適當材料,如本 質上爲可撓薄片或膜之材料製成。此種可撓薄片可包含聚 酉旨、聚乙晞、纖維素,或任何其他適當材料或其任何組 合。使用具有臨界表面能大於可硬化材料之材料,或許有 益。 然而,前述並不排除其中第二層40具有永久結合於第二 層4 0之第二補強元件6 0,如圖1 1及丨2 A所示。此種永久結 合於第二層40之第二補強元件應不實質干擾纖維偏向進入 偏向構件10之偏向導管中,包括在第一層3〇形成之偏向導 管35中之能力。爲此,此種補強元件6〇可包含例如眾多交 織紗線’其中平行紗線隔開充分距離以使補強元件6 〇對纖 維進入偏向構件10之偏向導管之能力之干擾減至最小。After the embossing roll 190, the embossing roll 118 may be printed after the embossing roll forming step, for example, using a roll i90a that receives ink from a spray 195 (shown schematically in dotted lines in FIG. 5). Other methods known in the art such as chemical, electromagnetic, laser, thermal, etc. may be used in addition or instead to generate opaque areas in the mask 110. In FIG. 50, when the floating flower pressing roll 118 containing the ink on the floating flower pressing film 118 is in contact with the roller, the ink is preliminarily predetermined, for example, corresponding to the pattern of the floating flower protrusions on the floating flower pressing roll 190. Applied to film 118. When the mask 110 is in contact with the coating 300 of the hardenable material, the pattern of the protrusions 5 is a corresponding void, negative, and pattern in the coating 300. For example, the mask 110 may be printed so that the distal surface of the protrusion 115 is sufficiently opaque to prevent the coating region corresponding to the opaque region 115 from hardening. Therefore, the amount of liquid resin that is shielded from radiation and washed away later can be reduced by removing some resin from the masked portion of the coating before the hardening step. As a result, by using the three-dimensional mask 110 of the present invention, we can save = equivalent hardenable materials. As used herein, the additional protrusions are protrusions formed from a material that is an inherent part of the non-mask 110 material. Additional protrusions may be formed independently from the mask 110. However, additional protrusions 115 formed from the same material as the mask 110 are not excluded. Additional protrusions may be attached (eg, by an adhesive or chemical method) to the mask 110 to form an integral structure therewith. Alternatively, the pattern of the additional protrusions may be supplied independently and stacked on the coating 3GG, as shown schematically in FIG. 51. Additional protrusions can be made from a variety of suitable materials, including organic and non-organic materials, such as, but not limited to, plastic, resin, glass, wood, metal, leather spinning -57- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 ___ 5. Description of the invention (55) Fabrics and any combination thereof. In FIG. 51, the three-dimensional mask 110 includes a first element 410 having a pattern of transparent and opaque regions, and a floating pattern pressing element 810. The first element 410 advances around the rollers 11 la, 11 lb, 11 lc, and 11 Id, and the floating flower pressing element 810 is supplied from the roll 810a. Both the first element 410 and the floating flower pressing element 810 can be fed: into the jaw formed by the coating 300 and the rolling mill 111a, where the first element 410 and the floating flower pressing element 810 meet to form a composite structure, where The pattern of the transparent and opaque regions 112/114 is combined with the pattern of the protrusions 115 to form a desired three-dimensional pattern of the frame 20 of the biasing member 10. This configuration provides greater flexibility in the control (and, if necessary, change) of the transparent and opaque patterns 112/114 and the protrusion 115 pattern. Fig. 52 shows another specific example of this method, in which the mask 110 is formed by at least two independent elements. In FIG. 52, both the first element 410 including the endless transparent film advancing around the rolls Ilia, 111b, 111c, and llld and the floating flower pressing element 810 are fed into the jaw formed by the coating layer 300 and the roll 111a. One specific example of a floating flower pressing element 810 clearly shown in Fig. 52A includes a structure that is breathable in nature and can be formed by, for example, interlaced filaments or die forging, die forming, or any other means known in the art. Of course, the pattern shown in Fig. 52A is a representative specific example, and the floating flower pressing element 810 may use various other appropriate patterns. When the film 410 and the floating flower pressing element 810 travel between the rollers 111a and 111b, they form a composite mask 110. The floating flower pressing element 810 generates a three-dimensional pattern in the coating 300, and at the same time, it can shield The selected area is not exposed to hardening radiation. The transparent film 410 can also be used to constrain the area of the coating 300 -58- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public love) 559632 A7 _______ B7_ 5. Description of the invention (56) Does not extend beyond the floating flower pressing element 810 outline. If necessary, the film 410 may also have a pattern of opaque areas to match the pattern of the embossed pressing element 810. Alternatively, the floating flower pressing element 810 may be transparent or translucent, and the diaphragm film 410 alone forms an opaque area. In the two specific examples shown in Figs. 51 and 52, the two components constituting the composite three-dimensional mask can be coated with, for example, an adhesive (shown as an example in Fig. 52 as an adhesive coating) before the components are contacted at 41 and 81. The applicator 420 is sprayed on the first element 410) or the floating flower pressing element 8 10 or the two are combined together, even temporarily. This can prevent the embossed pressing element 810 from being immersed in the coating 300 between the rolls 11a and 11b, or when alignment between the embossed pressing element 81 and the first element 410 is required, and the first element 41 is not aligned. quasi. The next step includes exposing the first hardenable material 300 to the hardening radiation of the source 120 through the mask 110, thereby disclosing areas that are not completely shielded by the first opaque area 114a, that is, transparent through the mask 110. The coating in area 112 or in a partially transparent area (or partially opaque area) that receives hardened radiation is hardened. In the specific example shown in FIG. 19, the back film 130, the reinforcing element 50, the first hardenable material 300, and the first mask 110 all form a unit and travel from the emulsion roller llla to the mask guide roller lllb together. . In the middle of the roll llla and the mask guide lllb, and where the back film 130 and the reinforcing element 50 are still juxtaposed with the first forming surface 100, the first hardenable material 300 is exposed to the source of hardening radiation 120 Hardening radiation. If the hardenable material contains a liquid photosensitive resin, an exposure lamp can generally be used to provide illumination mainly at a wavelength that will cause the liquid photosensitive resin to harden. This wavelength is characteristic of liquid photosensitive resin. Any appropriate lighting source, such as mercury solitary lamp, pulsating xenon lamp, electrodeless lamp and -59- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (57) Can be used with fluorescent lights. Hardening is generally manifested by curing or semi-curing the coating of hardenable material in the exposed area to a predetermined depth or thickness of the coating. In contrast, unexposed areas or parts out of hardened radiation remain fluid and can be removed from the coating. The intensity of the radiation and the duration of its exposure depend on the degree of hardening required in the area exposed to the radiation. In the case of photosensitive resins, the absolute intensity and duration of exposure depend on the resin's chemical properties, its light characteristics, the thickness of the selected pattern and coating, or the desired depth of the area to be hardened. Furthermore, the exposure intensity and angle of incidence of the hardened radiation have an important effect on the presence or absence of a cone in the wall of the preselected pattern of the frame to be constructed. U.S. Patent No. 5,962,860 (granted on October 5, 1999 in the name of Trokhan et al.) Is generally assigned and is hereby incorporated by reference. This patent discloses a device for generating a controlled light emission for hardening of a photosensitive resin, which includes a reflector having a plurality of elongated reflective facets that can be adjusted so that the hardened radiation actually faces the desired direction. The patent further discloses a radiation management device comprising a small reflector juxtaposed with a radiation source, a method and intensity for controlling hardened radiation. The next step includes removing almost all of the unhardened first hardenable material 300 from the semi-structured first layer. In the specific example shown in FIG. 19, the mask 110 and the back film 130 are separated from the first layer of the solid body including the reinforcing member 50 and the semi-structure near the mask guide roller 111b. The first layer of the compound advances to the vicinity of the first removal shoe 119, where emptying or other methods can be applied to the compound, and a considerable amount of still liquid (unhardened) material can be removed from the compound. The second layer 40 can be made from the second hardenable material 400 in almost the same manner. In some specific examples, the second layer 40 does not have a permanent bond to the second -60- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (58) Reinforcing element of hardened material 400. In the process of manufacturing the second layer 40, it may be appropriate to use the second reinforcing element 60, especially when the second layer 40 includes a semi-continuous pattern or a pattern of a plurality of independent protrusions. The second reinforcing element 60 may include a temporary reinforcing element. As used herein, "temporary reinforcement element" means to use 'in the steps of constructing a specific (first or second) layer and / or combining the first and second layers' and remove it after completing its intended function, and finally The deflection element does not have its reinforcing element. The temporary reinforcing element may be made of any suitable material, such as a flexible sheet or film in nature. Such a flexible sheet may comprise polyethylene, polyethylene, cellulose, or any other suitable material or any combination thereof. It may be beneficial to use materials with critical surface energy greater than hardenable materials. However, the foregoing does not exclude that the second layer 40 has a second reinforcing element 60 permanently bonded to the second layer 40, as shown in Figs. 11 and 2A. Such a second reinforcing element permanently combined with the second layer 40 should not substantially interfere with the ability of the fiber to enter the deflection duct of the deflection member 10, including the deflection duct 35 formed in the first layer 30. To this end, such a reinforcing element 60 may include, for example, a plurality of interlaced yarns' in which parallel yarns are spaced sufficiently apart to minimize interference of the reinforcing element 60 with the ability of the fiber to enter the deflection duct of the deflection member 10.

包含所明的短效連接紗線’’(fugitive tie yarns)之補強元 件可有地用於第二層40。概括讓與之pcT申請案WO 99/14425 ( 1999 年 3 月 25 日公告及名稱爲 Multiple Layer Foraminous Belts With Fugitive Tie Yarns)揭示一種用於在 造紙過程中支撑纖維素纖維結構之帶。帶包含具有二層… 即紙匹接觸第一層及面向機器第二層一之補強元件,及包 -61 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 559632 A7 _______B7 五、發明説明(59 ) 。硬化光敏樹脂之圖案層,該圖案層通體具有眾多導管。 補強元件之二層係藉整體或附加連接紗線結合在一起,使 ..得在導管内之連接紗線至少一部份在光敏樹脂已硬化後可 移除。這些”短效,,連接紗線對光化輻射實質透明,且在不 再需要彼等來穩定補強元件之面向紙匹層與面向機器層之 間的關係時,可藉化學或機械方法移除。特定言之,位於 導管内之連接紗線之部份可移除,俾帶性質如突出開放區 域在整個帶中爲實質各向同性。一種移除短效附加連接紗 線之方式可包括增溶與機械能之組合,其係由作爲帶製造 及造紙方法之一部份之淋水系統所提供。用於短效連接紗 線之適當材料包含可藉化學或機械方法可控制地移除的材 料。PCT申請案W0 99/14425之揭示内容以參考方式併於 此0 在圖19中,臨時補強元件60係以在第二機器方向(方向 箭頭MD2所示)繞輥240、241及242行進之無端帶之形式顯 示。然而,應注意的是,臨時補強元件6 〇可以供應捲欲捲 繞成捲取捲之形式供應,此方式類似於如上所述包含用於 背膜130之供應捲131a及捲取捲113b之配置。 與製造第一層30之步驟相似,第二可硬化材料4〇〇及臨 時補強元件60之塗層可用第二成形表面2〇〇支撑。第二可 硬化材料400可利用例如噴嘴260沉積。第二可硬化材料 400可和第一可硬化材料300相同或不同。控制第二可硬化 材料400之塗層之厚度至預選値可藉例如軋輥2 1丨a完成。 如以上已説明,所得偏向構件1 〇之厚度係由第一層3 〇與第 -62- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ____ B7 五、發明説明(60 ) 二層40之合併厚度所形成。第二可硬化材料4〇〇之塗層係 透過具有透明及不透明區域之第二掩模21〇曝露於硬化輻 射第二源220之硬化輻射下。第二掩模21〇在方向箭頭d2所 示之方向行進,在軋輥21 la下轉彎,此時第二掩模2 10可 與第二塗層400之表面進行接觸,再行進至掩模導輕 21 lb ’在其附近第二掩模210可和第二塗層4〇〇脱離接觸。 然後’幾乎全部未硬化之第二可硬化材料4〇〇即藉例如第 一移除鞋219自半完成之第二層40移除;在移降鞋時可對 複合物施加眞空,俾相當量之液體未硬化材料可自複合物 移除。 在第一與第一層3〇、40已實質形成之後,即在圖μ ” N 1 ”所示鉗口使第一層3 0與第二層4 〇以面對面關係合在 起。用於使第一與第一層30、40合在一起之任何習知裝 置都可使用。在圖19具體例中,第一層3〇行進繞過第一札 輕140,而第二層4 0則行進繞過第二軋輕240。甜口 N 1係 在幸L輥140與240之個別外表面間形成。二圖案—第一與第 二層30、40- -也許需要相互對準,俾可在钳口 N1獲得二 個別圖案疊置所形成的所欲合併三維度圖案。 根據本發明方法之一具體例,第一層3 〇與第二層4 〇係硬 化至彼等個別接觸表面保留一些充分黏合性質、在彼等接 觸時能使第一與第二層30、40之間牢牢結合之程度。亦 即’當第一與第二層30、40在鉗口 N1結合在一起時,相 互面對之第一與第二層30、40之外表面保留充分量之表面 能且由於未完全固化而可結合在一起。請參閲圖19,第— -63-Reinforcing elements containing the known fugitive tie yarns can be used in the second layer 40 in a proper manner. PCT application WO 99/14425 (published March 25, 1999 and titled Multiple Layer Foraminous Belts With Fugitive Tie Yarns) discloses a belt for supporting cellulosic fiber structures in the papermaking process. The belt contains two layers ... the paper is in contact with the first layer and the reinforcing element facing the second layer of the machine, and the bag is -61-this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) 559632 A7 _______B7 5. Description of the invention (59). The pattern layer of the hardened photosensitive resin has a plurality of ducts throughout the body. The two layers of the reinforcing element are combined together by the whole or additional connecting yarn, so that at least a part of the connecting yarn in the catheter can be removed after the photosensitive resin has hardened. These "short-lived", connecting yarns are substantially transparent to actinic radiation, and can be removed by chemical or mechanical methods when they are no longer needed to stabilize the relationship between the paper-facing layer and the machine-facing layer of the reinforcing element. In particular, the part of the connecting yarn located in the catheter can be removed, and the properties of the strap such as highlighting the open area are substantially isotropic throughout the belt. One way to remove the short-acting additional connecting yarn can include adding A combination of solvent and mechanical energy, provided by a watering system as part of belt manufacturing and papermaking methods. Suitable materials for short-lived joining yarns include those that can be removed controllably by chemical or mechanical methods Material. The disclosure of PCT application WO 99/14425 is hereby incorporated by reference. In FIG. 19, the temporary reinforcing element 60 travels around the rollers 240, 241, and 242 in the second machine direction (shown by the direction arrow MD2). It is shown in the form of an endless belt. However, it should be noted that the temporary reinforcing element 6 can be supplied in the form of a roll to be wound into a roll, similar to the method described above including the supply roll 131a for the back film 130. and Configuration of take-up 113b. Similar to the steps of manufacturing the first layer 30, the coating of the second hardenable material 400 and the temporary reinforcing element 60 can be supported by the second forming surface 200. The second hardenable material 400 can be used For example, the nozzle 260 is deposited. The second hardenable material 400 may be the same as or different from the first hardenable material 300. Controlling the thickness of the coating of the second hardenable material 400 to a preselection can be accomplished by, for example, the roll 2 1a. As above It has been explained that the thickness of the resulting deflection member 10 is determined by the first layer 30 and the -62- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (60 ) Formed by the combined thickness of the two layers 40. The coating of the second hardenable material 400 is exposed to the hardening radiation of the hardening radiation second source 220 through a second mask 21 with transparent and opaque areas. The mask 21 travels in the direction shown by the directional arrow d2, and turns under the roller 21 la. At this time, the second mask 2 10 can contact the surface of the second coating layer 400, and then travel to the mask guide 21 lb. 'In the vicinity of the second mask 210 may be The second coating layer 400 comes out of contact. Then 'almost all of the non-hardened second hardenable material 400 is removed from the semi-finished second layer 40 by, for example, the first removing shoe 219; Air can be applied to the composite, and a considerable amount of liquid unhardened material can be removed from the composite. After the first and first layers 30 and 40 have been substantially formed, the jaws shown in the figure μ "N 1" The first layer 30 and the second layer 40 are brought together in a face-to-face relationship. Any conventional device for bringing the first and first layers 30 and 40 together can be used. In the specific example of FIG. 19, The first layer 30 travels around the first lighter 140, while the second layer 40 travels around the second lighter 240. The sweet mouth N 1 is formed between the individual outer surfaces of the L rollers 140 and 240. Two patterns—the first and second layers 30 and 40—may need to be aligned with each other. You can obtain two desired three-dimensional patterns formed by stacking two individual patterns at jaw N1. According to a specific example of the method of the present invention, the first layer 30 and the second layer 40 are hardened until their individual contact surfaces retain some sufficient adhesion properties, which can make the first and second layers 30, 40 when they contact each other. The degree of firmness between the two. That is, 'when the first and second layers 30, 40 are bonded together in the jaw N1, the outer surfaces of the first and second layers 30, 40 facing each other retain a sufficient amount of surface energy and are not fully cured. Can be combined together. Refer to Figure 19, page--63-

559632 A7 ___ __B7 五、發明説明(61 ) 層之上表面31及第二層40乏底表面42,在麵口 N1合在 一起之前,可不硬化至完全硬度且可保持部份硬化狀態以 保留充分量之表面能,以能使第一與第二層3〇、4〇結合在 —起〇 第一與第二層30、40在鉗口 N1之結合可藉第一及第二 乾輥140、240施加之壓力促進。在鉗口 N1時,第一與第二 層3 0、4 0係相互恩在一起,而合併之結構於預定時間内再 自鉗口 N1往前行進至钮口 N2。任何習知裝置都可用於施 加壓力於第一與第二層30、40以使彼等牢牢結合。在圖 19中,輔助壓輥15〇及250概略顯示爲將第一與第二層3〇、 4 0相互壓在一起。 在包含第一與第二層30、40結合在一起的半成形偏向構 件1 0離開鉗口 N 2後,其可進入樹脂洗滌淋洗器124及樹脂 洗滌站排水槽125附近,在此複合物可用水或其他適當液 體充分洗滌以移除基本上全部之剩餘未硬化(且仍爲液體) 材料300、400,其可經由樹脂洗滌站排水槽125自系統排 出。再者,若有需要,可利用額外樹脂移除鞋(未示出)以 藉眞空或其他方式來移除任何殘留未硬化材料300、400。 然後’可由配置在成形中複合框構2 0之兩面之硬化輻射源 121及122進行最後硬化以完成結合層30、40及硬化複合結 構之過程,藉以形成本發明之偏向構件1 〇。若已使用臨時 補強元件6 0,則臨時補強元件6 0可在鉗口 N 2或稍後在偏 向構件10已實質成形時自第二層40分離或移除,視方法之 特定具體例而定。 -64- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(62 ) 本發明涵蓋其中第一與第二層30、40之一或二者,或至 少其個別接觸表面3 1、4 2包含化學活性成分以能使或促進 第一與第二層3 0、4 0結合之具體例。如此所用,”化學活 性成分’’意指在某些條件下能與其接觸之另一種材料形成化 學鍵或其他有利缔合之物質。適當材料包括底漆及偶合 劑。底漆可包含多官能及多組份調配物。官能基之一可和 % 一層之材料形成化學鍵,而另一官能基則和第二層結合 或有利地缔合。用於促使甲基丙烯酸酯光聚合物層與聚酯 層結合之此種材料之實例將是丙烯酸酯封端之聚丁二烯。 此種成分也可具有輔助黏結劑,如乙晞基共聚物(醋酸乙缔 酯/氣化物/醇三聚物)。適當偶合劑包括Kenrich石油化學 公司(Bayonne,NJ)出售之鈥酸鹽及結酸鹽。不願受理論 所約束,咸信這些以鈦及錘爲基之四官能有機金屬偶合劑 很有效,因爲中心金屬之四價有助於電子共享,而依次增 強不類似材料間的黏附力。 化學活性成分可固有地存在於至少第一可硬化材料300與 第二可硬化材料400之一。或者,化學活性成分可加至至 少第一及第二可硬化材料300、400之一,或至少第一及第 二層接觸表面之一。在圖1 9中,第一化學活性成分概略顯 示爲以塗敷器127噴在第一層30之上表面31 ;而第二化學 活性成分概略顯示爲以塗敷器227噴在第一層4 0之上表面 4 2。此種化學活性成分之化學組成主要係受第一及第二可 硬化材料300、400之化學組成所支配。例如,若第一及第 二可硬化材料300、400爲相同且包含液體光敏樹脂,則可 -65- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7559632 A7 ___ __B7 V. Description of the invention (61) The upper surface 31 of the layer and the bottom surface 42 of the second layer 40 may not be hardened to the full hardness before the mouth N1 is brought together and may be partially hardened to retain sufficient The amount of surface energy can be used to enable the first and second layers 30 and 40 to be combined—from the combination of the first and second layers 30 and 40 to the jaw N1, the first and second dry rolls 140, 240 applied pressure promotes. In the jaw N1, the first and second layers 30 and 40 are mutually close together, and the combined structure advances from the jaw N1 to the button N2 within a predetermined time. Any conventional device can be used to apply pressure to the first and second layers 30, 40 to hold them firmly together. In Fig. 19, the auxiliary pressure rollers 150 and 250 are schematically shown as pressing the first and second layers 30 and 40 together. After the half-shaped deflection member 10 including the first and second layers 30 and 40 is combined and leaves the jaw N 2, it can enter the resin washing and rinsing unit 124 and the resin washing station drainage tank 125, where the compound It may be sufficiently washed with water or other suitable liquid to remove substantially all of the remaining unhardened (and still liquid) material 300, 400, which may be discharged from the system via the resin washing station drainage tank 125. Furthermore, if necessary, additional resin removal shoes (not shown) may be used to remove any remaining unhardened material 300, 400 by airing or other means. Then, the hardening radiation sources 121 and 122 disposed on both sides of the composite frame structure 20 in the forming process can be finally hardened to complete the process of the bonding layers 30, 40 and the hardened composite structure, thereby forming the biasing member 10 of the present invention. If the temporary reinforcing element 60 has been used, the temporary reinforcing element 60 can be separated or removed from the second layer 40 at the jaw N 2 or later when the deflection member 10 has been substantially formed, depending on the specific example of the method . -64- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (62) The present invention covers one or both of the first and second layers 30, 40 , Or at least the individual contact surfaces 3 1, 4 2 include specific examples of chemically active ingredients to enable or promote the bonding of the first and second layers 30, 40. As used herein, "chemically active ingredient" means a substance that can form a chemical bond or other beneficial association with another material that is in contact with it under certain conditions. Suitable materials include primers and coupling agents. Primers can include polyfunctional and polyfunctional Component formulation. One of the functional groups can form a chemical bond with the material of one layer, and the other functional group is combined or favorably associated with the second layer. It is used to promote the methacrylate photopolymer layer and the polyester layer. An example of such a material combined would be an acrylate-terminated polybutadiene. This component may also have a co-binder, such as an ethylene copolymer (ethylene acetate / gasification / alcohol terpolymer). Suitable coupling agents include salts and sulphates sold by Kenrich Petrochemical Company (Bayonne, NJ). Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that these tetrafunctional organometallic coupling agents based on titanium and hammer are effective because The quaternary valence of the central metal facilitates electron sharing, which in turn enhances adhesion between dissimilar materials. Chemically active ingredients may inherently exist in at least the first hardenable material 300 and the second hardenable material 400 Alternatively, the chemically active ingredient can be added to at least one of the first and second hardenable materials 300, 400, or at least one of the first and second contact surfaces. In FIG. 19, the first chemically active ingredient is schematically shown It is sprayed on the surface 31 on the first layer 30 with the applicator 127; and the second chemically active ingredient is shown as sprayed on the surface 42 on the first layer 40 with the applicator 227. The chemical composition is mainly dominated by the chemical composition of the first and second hardenable materials 300, 400. For example, if the first and second hardenable materials 300, 400 are the same and contain a liquid photosensitive resin, the Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7

五、發明説明(63 施加額外量之液體光敏樹脂於欲結合之一或二面31、42。 結合後,可供應額外Uv輻射以使施加之樹脂與仍存在於層 30及40中之殘留單體交聯。 熟請本技藝者將了解,代替或除第一及第二化學活性成 分外,可利用各種黏合材料以能使或促進第一及第二層 30、40結合在一起。預期在此種具體例中,至少第一及第 二層30、40之一可在結合步驟之前完全硬化至最後硬度。 根據另一具體例,第一及第二層3〇、40之一或二者可由 先提供一層具有預選厚度之適當材料及然後在其中形成導 管部份而製成。例如,眾多獨立偏向導管可由本技藝已知 之任何習用方法如鑽孔、化學方法、印刷、雷射切割等等 形成。若二層之一包含半連續圖案或包含眾多獨立突出物 之圖案,則其可由提供個別獨立元件並將這些個別獨立元 件附著於另一層而形成。 圖22A-25A概略顯示本發明偏向構件10之若干具體例及 一種利用具有差別不透明度及梯度不透明度之本發明掩模 110製造此種偏向構件1 0之方法。以下方法也可用於建構 包含多層結構之複合框構2 0之任何個別層。就層3 0、4 0 之一之構造而言,此一方法的許多步驟與以上有關製造一 個別層所述之方法步驟類似,而因此在不重複二方法共同 的全部細節下,將輕易爲熟諳本技藝者所了解。 如圖22A-25A所示及以上所述,掩模11〇具有透明區域 112及不透明區域114。不透明區域114包含具有第一不透 明度之至少第一不透明區域114a,及具有與第一不透明度 -66- 本紙張尺度適财® ®家標準(CNS) A4规格(21ϋ 乂 297公釐) 裝 訂V. Description of the invention (63 Apply an additional amount of liquid photosensitive resin to one or both sides to be combined 31, 42. After the combination, additional UV radiation can be supplied to make the applied resin and the residual monomer still present in layers 30 and 40 Those skilled in the art will understand that instead of or in addition to the first and second chemically active ingredients, various bonding materials can be used to enable or promote the bonding of the first and second layers 30, 40. It is expected that In this specific example, at least one of the first and second layers 30, 40 can be completely hardened to the final hardness before the bonding step. According to another specific example, one or both of the first and second layers 30, 40 It may be made by first providing a layer of a suitable material with a preselected thickness and then forming a portion of the catheter therein. For example, a number of independently biased catheters may be formed by any conventional method known in the art such as drilling, chemical methods, printing, laser cutting, etc. Forming. If one of the two layers contains a semi-continuous pattern or a pattern containing a plurality of independent protrusions, it can be formed by providing individual independent elements and attaching these individual independent elements to another layer. Figures 22A-25A A few specific examples of the biasing member 10 of the present invention and a method of manufacturing such a biasing member 10 by using the mask 110 of the present invention having differential opacity and gradient opacity are briefly shown. The following method can also be used to construct a composite frame including a multilayer structure Construct any individual layer of 20. As far as the construction of one of layers 30, 40 is concerned, many of the steps of this method are similar to the method steps described above for the manufacture of another layer, and therefore they are not repeated in common. The full details will be easily understood by those skilled in the art. As shown in FIGS. 22A-25A and described above, the mask 110 has a transparent region 112 and an opaque region 114. The opaque region 114 includes a first opaque region. At least the first opaque area 114a, and has the same opacity as the first opacity-66- This paper size is suitable for financial ® ® Home Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21ϋ 乂 297mm) binding

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(64 ) 不同之第二不透明度之第二不透明區域H4b。例如’第一 不透明度可大於第二不透明度。第一不透明區域114a可具 有光學密度大於第二不透明區域114b之光學密度。在圖 2 2 A - 2 5 A之代表性具體例中’第一不透明度係爲完全防止 第一不透明區域所遮蔽之可硬化材料之區域(在此定義爲” 第一區域”)硬化之不透明度。在包含光敏樹脂之可硬化材 料之情形時,此種第一不透明區域114a通常爲純黑色,可 完全阻擋活化波長之光。同時,具有第二不透明度之掩模 之第二不透明區域114b容許被其遮蔽之塗層區域(在此定義 爲”第二區域”)部份硬化,亦即,硬化至一定深度或厚度, 而該些第二區域之其餘厚度則保持未硬化。在包含光敏樹 脂之可硬化材料之情形時,此種第一不透明區域114a可爲” 灰色”,其容許活化波長之硬化光穿透塗層至其一定深度, 亦即,至塗層厚度之某一預定深度。 當可硬化材料之塗層透過具有差別不透明區域之掩模110 受到來自源120之硬化輻射照射時,被第一不透明區域 114a遮蔽之塗層之第一區域在塗層之整個厚度保持不硬化 (例如液體),而被第二不透明區域114b遮蔽之塗層之第二 區域則僅保持不硬化至塗層厚度之一定部份,如圖23-25 清楚顯示。在一定硬化輻射強度下,第二不透明度可經選 擇以預選及控制所要硬化輻射穿透之程度,以使塗層硬化 至所要深度或厚度,在此定義爲”第二厚度”。透明區域 112容許塗層之其餘部份(此處定義爲,,第三區域”)硬化可硬 化材料至塗層之整個厚度(此處定義爲,,第一厚度”),如以 -67-559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (64) A second opaque area H4b with a different second opacity. For example, the 'first opacity may be greater than the second opacity. The first opaque region 114a may have an optical density greater than that of the second opaque region 114b. In the representative specific example of Fig. 2 A-2 5 A, the "first opacity" is the area where the hardenable material area (defined herein as the "first area") completely prevented by the first opaque area is hardened. transparency. In the case of a hardenable material containing a photosensitive resin, such a first opaque region 114a is usually pure black, and can completely block light at an active wavelength. At the same time, the second opaque region 114b of the mask having the second opacity allows the partially-coated coating region (defined herein as the "second region") to be partially hardened, that is, to a certain depth or thickness, and The remaining thickness of the second regions remains unhardened. In the case of a hardenable material containing a photosensitive resin, such a first opaque region 114a may be "grey", which allows hardened light at an activation wavelength to penetrate the coating to a certain depth, that is, to a certain thickness of the coating. A predetermined depth. When the coating of the hardenable material is irradiated by the hardening radiation from the source 120 through the mask 110 having the differentially opaque areas, the first area of the coating shielded by the first opaque area 114a remains non-hardened throughout the thickness of the coating ( For example, liquid), and the second area of the coating blocked by the second opaque area 114b remains only non-hardened to a certain portion of the coating thickness, as shown in Figure 23-25. Under a certain hardening radiation intensity, the second opacity can be selected to preselect and control the degree of penetration of the hardening radiation to harden the coating to a desired depth or thickness, which is defined herein as a "second thickness". The transparent region 112 allows the remainder of the coating (defined here, the third region ") to harden the hardenable material to the entire thickness of the coating (defined here, the first thickness"), as -67-

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(65 上已解釋。 如圖22A-25A概略所示,懸吊部份49之各種形狀及構切 面構型可利用包含具有差別不透明度及梯度不透明度之區 域之本發明掩模製造。爲方便起見,如圖22A-25所用, 具有括號數字尾之編號係代表第一不透明區域114a (自 114a(l)至 114a(8))、第二不透明區域 U4b(自 114b( 1)至 114b( 12))及懸吊部份49(自49(1)至49(12))及其背表面 49b(自49b(l)至459b(12))之各種代表性具體例;而未使 用該字尾之編號(112a,114b,49及49b)則一般代表這些 元件。 在圖22A-25中,掩模11〇之第一不透明區域ii4a使對應 之塗層第一區域在其整個厚度保持不硬化,而因此自半成 形之偏向構件移除以形成獨立偏向導管35。鄰近第一不透 明區域114a之第二不透明區域114b則使對應之塗層第二區 域僅硬化至塗層整個厚度之一部份,亦即,至第二厚度, 以形成懸吊部份4 9。塗層之其餘部份,亦即,對應於掩模 110之透明區域112之第三區域則透過透明區域112曝露於 硬化輻射下以硬化至塗層整個厚度。圖2 3 - 2 5之剖面圖清 楚顯示’所得結構包含眾多基底3〇及自眾多基底3〇橫向延 伸之眾多懸吊部份4 9。 例如,如圖22八及23所示,一些第二不透明區域1141), 特別是114b( 1 )至114b(4)係毗鄰且圍繞菱形獨立第一不透 明區域114a。在硬化完成之後,所得框構2〇包含眾多菱形 獨立偏向導管35分散於整個框構20之實質連續圖案。每一 -68-559632 A7 B7 5. Explanation of the invention (explained on 65). As shown in the outline of FIGS. 22A-25A, the various shapes and configuration planes of the suspension portion 49 can be used to include regions with areas of differential opacity and gradient opacity. Invention mask manufacturing. For convenience, as shown in Figures 22A-25, the numbers with parentheses indicate the first opaque area 114a (from 114a (l) to 114a (8)), the second opaque area U4b (from 114b (1) to 114b (12)) and suspension parts 49 (from 49 (1) to 49 (12)) and their back surfaces 49b (from 49b (l) to 459b (12)) For example, the numbers that do not use this suffix (112a, 114b, 49, and 49b) generally represent these components. In Figure 22A-25, the first opaque area ii4a of the mask 11 is the first area of the corresponding coating. It remains unhardened throughout its thickness and is therefore removed from the semi-formed deflection member to form a separate deflection duct 35. The second opaque region 114b adjacent to the first opaque region 114a hardens the corresponding coating second region only to the coating A portion of the entire thickness of the layer, that is, to a second thickness, to form a hanging portion 49. The rest of the layer, that is, the third region corresponding to the transparent region 112 of the mask 110 is exposed to hardening radiation through the transparent region 112 to harden to the entire thickness of the coating. The cross-sections of Figures 2-2 5 are clear It is shown that the resulting structure includes a plurality of substrates 30 and a plurality of suspension portions 49 extending laterally from the plurality of substrates 30. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, some second opaque regions 1141), especially 114b (1 ) To 114b (4) are adjacent and surround the diamond-shaped independent first opaque region 114a. After the hardening is completed, the resulting frame 20 includes a substantially continuous pattern of diamond-shaped independent deflection ducts 35 dispersed throughout the frame 20. Each -68-

559632 A7 B7______ 五、發明説明(66 ) 偏向導管35在紙匹面21由懸吊部份49所圍繞;該懸吊部 份49係由僅硬化至塗層厚度一部份之塗層第二區域所形成 (圖 23) 〇 在圖22 A及23中,掩模之第二不透明區域114b〇)包含 怪定、非梯度不透明度,而每一第二不透明區域 114b (2 )、114b ( 3 )及114b (4)則包含梯度不透明度。如上 已提及,利用梯度不透明度,吾人即可製造具有差別及漸 次改變厚度之懸吊部份以及具有差別形狀之背表面4 9 b。 例如在圖2 3中,懸吊部份4 9 ( 1 )之背表面4 9 b (1)係實質微 小單平面且平行於X-Y平面,因爲在硬化時,其係與具有 固定、非梯度不透明度之掩模不透明區域疊置(而因此部份 被遮蔽)。同時,懸吊部份49(2)之背表面49b (2)相對於背 面2 2係錐形成”成斜角”,因爲在硬化時,其係對應於具有 梯度不透明度之掩模不透明區域。熟諳本技藝者應了解的 是,由利用梯度不透明度所產生的背表面49b(2)之錐形及 /或形狀之程度係視不透明區域中梯度不透明度分佈的特殊 圖案而定。以實例言之,圖2 3所示懸吊部份4 9 ( 3 )及 4 9(4),其背表面49b(3)及49b(4)分別在相互相反之方向 彎曲。此懸吊部份4 9之背表面4 9 b的形狀可藉由使用非線 性改變梯度不透明度而產生。 如上述,圖2 2 A及2 3所示之懸吊部份4 9包含,,懸臂”懸吊 部份,而圖2 2 B及圖2 4顯示”橋連”懸吊部份4 9。如從剖面 觀看,圖2 4所示之懸吊部份4 9每一個皆橋連兩相鄰基底 30。在此,掩模110之第二不透明區域114b(5)同樣具有單 -69- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(67 ) 一、非梯度不透明度,而所得對應懸吊部份4 9 ( 5 )具有恆 定厚度及平行於所得框構2 0背面2 2之實質平面背表面 49b(5)。同時,第二不透明區域1141)(6)及1141)(7)中具有 梯度不透明度之圖案,而懸吊部份4 9 (6)及4 9 (7)之個別背 表面49b(6)及49b(7)則塑成彎曲狀。對應於第二不透明 區域114b(8)之懸吊部份49(8),其背表面49b(8)之橫切 面包含正弦或”波浪”形狀。圖2 2 B及2 4所例舉之框構2 0係 實質連續,其間分散眾多獨立偏向導管35,每一偏向導管 35由懸吊部份49部份”覆蓋&quot;。圖24也顯示自掩模之底面 110(b)延伸之突出物115之圖案,如上述。 在圖22C及25- -顯示包含懸吊部份49之框構20之另一代 表性具體例--中,掩模110之每一第二不透明區域114b顯 示爲具有恆定、非梯度不透明度。然而,這些不透明度相 互有差別:第二不透明區域114b(10)及114b(12)較第二不 透明區域114b (9)及114b( 1 1)不透明。結果,分別對應於 第二不透明區域114b(1 0)及114b(12)之懸吊部份49( 1 〇) 及49(12)已硬化至較大厚度,而因此較分別對應於第二不 透明區域114b(9)及114b(l 1)之懸吊部份49(9)及49(1 1) 爲厚。在圖22C及25中,有二種以其幾何圖案爲主的第一 不透明區域114a :包含眾多獨立圓形區域之第一不透明區 域114a (9),每一圓形區域由獨立透明區域112所包圍;及 包含由第一及第二不透明區域114a、114b所分開之區域之 第一不透明區域114a( 10)。兩種第一不透明區域114a皆具 有完全防止塗層對應第三區域在整個塗層厚度硬化之不透 -70- — 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇x 297公寶) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(68~~ ' 明度。所得框構20包含眾多獨立突出物,每一突出物中都 有自紙匹面21至背面22延伸通過框構2〇之整個厚度之獨 乂偏向導管35及橋連相鄰突出物之眾多懸吊部份49。如此 處以上所解釋,這些懸吊部份4 9可具有差別厚度。 圖25A顯示利用本發明包含透明/不透明區域圖案及三維 度外形圖案之掩模110製造本發明偏向構件1〇之方法之另 一代表性具體例。掩模之三維度外形包含自掩模之上面 110a向外延伸之突出物115a及自掩模11〇之底面mb向外 延伸之突出物115b。當掩模110置於流體可硬化材料3〇塗 廣上時,自掩模110之底面11 Ob延伸之突出物U5b之圖案 即沒入塗層中,因而排擠流體可硬化材料3 〇而因此在塗層 中形成對應之凹陷圖案;及自掩模110之上面ll〇a延伸且 包含建構及配置成可接受流體可硬化材料之空隙之突出物 115a之圖案即可接受填滿這些空隙之可硬化材料30,以在 建構中之框構20之準紙匹面21上形成對應之隆起物 (projection) 39 〇 圖25A所示掩模110之不透明區域圖案,如上述,具有差 別不透明度。第一不透明區域114a完全阻擋硬化輻射,因 而使與其對應(即,第一區域)之可硬化材料保持爲液體。 在該液體可硬化材料移除後,即形成導管35a及35b,導管 3 5 b係於懸吊部份4 9中形成。第二不透明區域114b容許硬 化輻射將塗層硬化至一定深度,因而形成懸吊部份4 9。透 明區域112使硬化輻射將塗層之第三區域硬化至第三區域 之整個厚度。·應注意的是,在圖23-25A中,框構20之差 -71 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公ϋ 裝 訂559632 A7 B7______ 5. Description of the invention (66) The deflection duct 35 is surrounded on the paper surface 21 by a hanging portion 49; the hanging portion 49 is a second area of the coating that is hardened to only a portion of the coating thickness The formed (Figure 23) 〇 In Figures 22 A and 23, the second opaque region 114b of the mask) contains strange, non-gradient opacity, and each second opaque region 114b (2), 114b (3) And 114b (4) contains gradient opacity. As mentioned above, by using gradient opacity, we can make suspended portions with different and gradually changing thicknesses and back surfaces 4 9 b with different shapes. For example, in Fig. 23, the back surface 4 9 b (1) of the suspension portion 4 9 (1) is a substantially tiny single plane and parallel to the XY plane, because when it is hardened, it is not related to having a fixed, non-gradient Transparency masks overlap opaque areas (and are therefore partially obscured). At the same time, the back surface 49b (2) of the suspending portion 49 (2) forms a "bevel" with respect to the back 22 cone, because when hardened, it corresponds to the opaque area of the mask with gradient opacity. Those skilled in the art should understand that the degree of conicity and / or shape of the back surface 49b (2) produced by using gradient opacity depends on the special pattern of gradient opacity distribution in the opaque area. By way of example, the suspension portions 49 (3) and 49 (4) shown in Fig. 23 have their back surfaces 49b (3) and 49b (4) bent in opposite directions, respectively. The shape of the back surface 4 9 b of this hanging portion 4 9 can be produced by changing the gradient opacity using non-linearity. As mentioned above, the suspension portions 49 shown in Figs. 22A and 23 include, "cantilever" suspension portions, and Figs. 22B and 24 show "bridge connection" suspension portions 49. As seen from the cross section, each of the hanging portions 49 shown in Fig. 24 is bridged to two adjacent substrates 30. Here, the second opaque region 114b (5) of the mask 110 also has a single -69- The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (67) 1. Non-gradient opacity, and the corresponding hanging part 4 9 (5) has a constant thickness and Parallel to the substantially planar back surface 49b (5) of the obtained frame 20 back 22 2. At the same time, the second opaque areas 1141) (6) and 1141) (7) have gradient opacity patterns, and the hanging part The individual back surfaces 49b (6) and 49b (7) of 4 9 (6) and 4 9 (7) are formed into curved shapes. Corresponding to the hanging portion 49 (8) of the second opaque area 114b (8), The cross-section of the back surface 49b (8) includes a sine or "wave" shape. The frame structure 20 illustrated in Figs. By suspension 49 part "cover &quot;. Fig. 24 also shows the pattern of the protrusions 115 extending from the bottom surface 110 (b) of the mask, as described above. In Figs. 22C and 25-another representative specific example showing the frame 20 including the hanging portion 49, each second opaque region 114b of the mask 110 is shown to have constant, non-gradient opacity. However, these opacity are different from each other: the second opaque areas 114b (10) and 114b (12) are more opaque than the second opaque areas 114b (9) and 114b (1 1). As a result, the hanging portions 49 (10) and 49 (12) corresponding to the second opaque areas 114b (1 0) and 114b (12), respectively, have been hardened to a larger thickness, and therefore more corresponding to the second opaque areas, respectively. The hanging portions 49 (9) and 49 (1 1) of the regions 114b (9) and 114b (l 1) are thick. In FIGS. 22C and 25, there are two types of first opaque regions 114a mainly based on their geometric patterns: a first opaque region 114a (9) including a plurality of independent circular regions, and each circular region is composed of independent transparent regions 112 Surrounded; and a first opaque region 114a (10) including an area separated by first and second opaque regions 114a, 114b. Both of the first opaque areas 114a have opacity that completely prevents the coating corresponding to the third area from being hardened throughout the thickness of the coating -70- — This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇x 297) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (68 ~~ 'Brightness. The resulting frame 20 includes a number of independent protrusions, each of which has a unique thickness extending from the paper surface 21 to the back 22 through the frame 20乂 bias the duct 35 and the numerous hanging portions 49 adjacent to the bridge. As explained above, these hanging portions 49 can have different thicknesses. Figure 25A shows the use of the present invention to include transparent / opaque area patterns and The mask 110 with a three-dimensional external shape pattern is another representative specific example of a method for manufacturing the biasing member 10 of the present invention. The three-dimensional shape of the mask includes a protrusion 115a extending outward from the upper surface 110a of the mask and a self-mask 11 The projection 115b of the bottom surface mb extending outward. When the mask 110 is placed on the fluid hardenable material 30, the pattern of the projection U5b extending from the bottom surface 11 Ob of the mask 110 is submerged in the coating. , So the squeezed fluid can harden Material 30, and thus a corresponding recessed pattern is formed in the coating; and the pattern 115a extending from the top 110a of the mask 110 and including protrusions 115a constructed and configured to accept voids of the fluid-hardenable material can be filled. The hardenable material 30 filled with these voids forms a corresponding projection 39 on the quasi-paper surface 21 of the frame 20 under construction. The pattern of the opaque area of the mask 110 shown in FIG. 25A, as described above, has Different opacity. The first opaque region 114a completely blocks the hardening radiation, thereby keeping the hardenable material corresponding to it (ie, the first region) as a liquid. After the liquid hardenable material is removed, the ducts 35a and 35b are formed, The duct 3 5 b is formed in the hanging portion 49. The second opaque region 114b allows hardening radiation to harden the coating to a certain depth, thereby forming the hanging portion 49. The transparent region 112 enables the hardening radiation to coat the coating. The third region hardens to the entire thickness of the third region. It should be noted that in Figure 23-25A, the difference between the frame structure 20 and -71-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ϋ Order

559632 A7 B7 明説明(69~~) &quot; 別陰影僅係爲説明及便利閲讀者分辨製造中框構2 〇之差異 部份之用。當利用圖2 2 A - 2 5 Α所示掩模11 〇製造時,框構 2 0之單一層係一整體結構,無分開其各組件之可見”界線 ,,〇 應注意的是,掩模110可具有第三、第四、第五等等差別 不透明度,其能使吾人製造本發明框構20之各種三維度圖 案’這些全邵涵蓋於及在本發明之範圍内。前述本發明偏 向構件10之具體例應解釋爲僅係實例,欲意用以例證掩模 110及偏向構件10之各種可能變化及變換,但不限制本發 明。熟諳本技藝者將了解,利用掩模i 10並根據此處所述 本發明之原理,即可形成實際無限制量之基底3 〇及懸吊部 份49之幾何形狀及相互位置之具體例及變化,其全部包括 在本發明内。 在未硬化或液體材料移除後,硬化或固化之材料即留下 而形成具有預選圖案之框構20。整個塗層厚度皆已硬化之 第三區域形成基底30 ;而僅部份硬化至第二厚度之第二區 域則形成懸吊部份49。由於可硬化材料可自將形成製造中 框構20之紙匹表面21之塗層表面硬化,故第二厚度係自製 造中框構2 0之紙匹面2 1向背面2 2延伸。因此,當液體未 硬化材料移除時,懸吊部份4 9即配置在距製造中層之底表 面所界定平面或距框構20之背面22 —段距離,亦即,,升高,, 或’’懸吊,’,以在懸吊部份49與背面22所界定之平面之間來 成立隙空間。應注意的是,當此一方法用於製造多層複2 偏向構件10之個別層(30、40)時,塗層之硬化即可自$製二 -72-559632 A7 B7 Explanation (69 ~~) &quot; Don't shade is only for the purpose of explaining and facilitating the reader to distinguish the difference between the frame 2 in manufacturing. When using the mask 11 shown in Figure 2 2 A-2 5 A, the single layer of the frame structure 20 is an integrated structure without visible boundaries separating its components. It should be noted that the mask 110 may have third, fourth, fifth, etc. differential opacity, which enables us to make various three-dimensional patterns of the frame 20 of the present invention. These are all covered and within the scope of the present invention. The foregoing invention is biased The specific example of the component 10 should be interpreted as merely an example, and is intended to illustrate various possible changes and transformations of the mask 110 and the biasing component 10, but does not limit the present invention. Those skilled in the art will understand that using the mask i 10 and According to the principles of the present invention described herein, specific examples and changes of the geometric shapes and mutual positions of the base 30 and the hanging portion 49 with practically unlimited amounts can be formed, all of which are included in the present invention. After the liquid or liquid material is removed, the hardened or cured material remains to form a frame 20 with a preselected pattern. A third region where the entire coating thickness has been hardened forms the substrate 30; and only partially hardened to the second thickness The second area is formed Suspended portion 49. Since the hardenable material can harden from the coating surface of the paper surface 21 forming the middle frame 20, the second thickness is from the paper surface 2 1 of the middle frame 20 to the back 2 2 extension. Therefore, when the liquid unhardened material is removed, the suspension portion 4 9 is arranged at a distance from the plane defined by the bottom surface of the manufacturing middle layer or from the back surface 22 of the frame 20, that is, the High, or "suspension," to create a gap space between the suspension portion 49 and the plane defined by the back surface 22. It should be noted that when this method is used to make a multilayer composite 2 deflection member 10 For individual layers (30, 40), the hardening of the coating can be made from $ 2 -72-

559632 A7 B7559632 A7 B7

五、發明説明(7Q 中個別層(30、40)之上面(31、41)或底面(32、42)進 行,在此情形時,懸吊部份4 9可自與先接受硬化輻射之表 面相反之表面所界定之平面升高。 任何一定懸吊部份4 9與X _ Y平面間的距離係由已自建模 中之構件移除之未硬化材料之厚度所界定。懸吊部份4 9可 自基底3 0在至少一方向橫向延伸。如此處所用,&quot;橫向,,及 其變換一般意指不同於Z -方向之定向,包括但不限於實質 平行於X - Y平面之任何方向。應注意的是,雖然説懸吊部 份49在實質平行於χ_γ平面之至少一方向”延伸”,但懸吊 部份49本身整體而言並不一定要平行於χ_γ平面。 纖維結構 偏向構件1 0之一用途係製造改良之纖維結構,如例如 紙。請參閲圖2 6 - 4 1,本發明之纖維結構5〇〇包含具有第一 性質之第一眾多微區域(或簡稱第一區域)51〇,及具有第二 性質之第二眾多微區域(或簡稱第二區域)54〇。第一性質在 至少一方面不同於第二性質。 如圖26_29所示,第一區域510係實質巨大單平面並界定 平行於Χ-Υ平面之第一平面。第一區域5 1〇具有第一高 度。第二區域5 40自第一區域51〇(或自其界定之第一平面) 在垂直於第一平面之方向(亦即,ζ -方向)向外延伸,以界 疋第二高度。應注意的是,”第二高度,,不必均句,亦即, 形成第二區域540之不同部份可具有不同高度。 在一具體例中,第一眾多微·區域5 1〇具有相對高密度,而 第二眾多微區域540具有相對低密度。在另一具體例中, 裝 訂V. Description of the invention (In 7Q, the upper layer (31, 41) or the lower surface (32, 42) of the individual layer (30, 40) is carried out. In this case, the hanging part 4 9 can receive the hardened radiation surface first. The plane defined by the opposite surface rises. The distance between any certain suspended portion 49 and the X_Y plane is defined by the thickness of the unhardened material that has been removed from the component under modeling. The suspended portion 4 9 may extend laterally from the substrate 30 in at least one direction. As used herein, &quot; transverse, and its transformation generally means an orientation other than the Z-direction, including but not limited to any substantially parallel to the X-Y plane It should be noted that although the suspension portion 49 is "extended" in at least one direction substantially parallel to the χ_γ plane, the suspension portion 49 itself is not necessarily parallel to the χ_γ plane as a whole. The fiber structure is biased One of the uses of the component 10 is to manufacture an improved fiber structure, such as paper. Please refer to Figures 26-41. The fiber structure 500 of the present invention includes the first plurality of micro-regions (or simply the first A region) 51, and a second The micro area (or the second area for short) 54. The first property is different from the second property in at least one aspect. As shown in Figure 26_29, the first area 510 is a substantially huge single plane and defines a parallel to the X-Z plane. The first plane. The first region 5 10 has a first height. The second region 5 40 is from the first region 51 (or the first plane defined by it) in a direction perpendicular to the first plane (that is, ζ- Direction) extends outward to define the second height. It should be noted that "the second height does not have to be a sentence, that is, different parts forming the second region 540 may have different heights. In a specific example The first plurality of micro-regions 5 10 has a relatively high density, while the second plurality of micro-regions 540 has a relatively low density. In another specific example, binding

•73-• 73-

559632 A7 B7 五 發明説明 第及第二眾多微區域510、540可藉彼等自單位重量分 辨例如,第二眾多微區域540可具有大於第一眾多微區 域5 10 &lt;單位重量。全部此等具體例皆包括在本發 圍。 祀 裝 、根據本發明,第二區域54G包含_般自第_平面向上延伸 之纖維圓頂狀物53〇及自纖維圓頂狀物53〇在第二高度橫向 延伸之纖維懸臂部份549。如此處所用,”圓頂狀物”二詞 就垂直於X-Y平面之纖維匹橫切面而言係敘述性。纖維圓 頂狀物可包含連續圖案、半連續圖案、眾多獨立元件或其 任何組合。”纖維枕狀物”(或簡稱,,枕狀物,,)540 一詞在此 處係用以界定圓頂狀物530及自其延伸之懸臂部份549,若 此種懸臂部份549與該圓頂狀物530同時存在時。纖維枕狀 物也可包含連續圖案、半連續圖案、眾多獨立元件或其任 何組合。559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention The second and second plurality of micro-regions 510, 540 can be distinguished by their own unit weight. For example, the second plurality of micro-regions 540 may have a unit weight greater than 5 10 &lt; All these specific examples are included in the present invention. In accordance with the present invention, the second region 54G includes a fiber dome 53 extending generally upward from the first plane and a fiber cantilever portion 549 extending laterally from the fiber dome 53 at a second height. As used herein, the term "dome" is narrative in terms of a cross-section of the fiber perpendicular to the X-Y plane. The fiber dome may include a continuous pattern, a semi-continuous pattern, a plurality of individual elements, or any combination thereof. The term "fiber pillow" (or simply, pillow ,,) 540 is used herein to define the dome 530 and the cantilever portion 549 extending therefrom. When the dome 530 exists at the same time. The fibrous pillow may also include a continuous pattern, a semi-continuous pattern, a number of independent elements, or any combination thereof.

因爲纖維懸臂部份549自纖維圓頂狀物530在第二高度橫 向延伸’故包含實質空隙空間之眾多袋560可在第一區域 510與纖維懸臂部份549中間形成。因此,纖維懸臂部份 549即形成第一區域51〇之部份、自其延伸之纖維圓頂狀物 530與纖維懸臂部份549之間所界定之特徵袋56〇,如圖27 及2 9-4 1所示。大部份由於這些實質空袋56〇之存在,咸信 本發明之纖維結構500,就一定單位重量而言,具有極高 吸收性特徵。袋560之特徵爲其中無任何或非常少量之纖 維。熟諳本技藝者將了解,由於如以下所討論製造纖維結 構500之方法及因爲纖維與纖維結構500整體之高可撓性質 -74- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7__ 五、發明説明(72 ) 之故,袋560中有一些個別纖維存在是可容許的,祇要這 些纖維不干擾纖維結構500之設計圖案及其預期性質即 可。就這些而言,”實質空隙,,空間隙/袋一詞欲意認知,由 於纖維結構1 〇及包含其之個別纖維之高可撓性質之故,袋 560中可存在一些不顯著量的纖維或其部份,祇要這些袋 560與纖維結構500之其餘部份可輕易區別即可,如圖3 2 -41之顯微圖片清楚所示。袋560之密度不大於0.005克/立方 厘米(g/cc),更特別是不大於0.004 g/cc而又更特別是不 大於 0·003 g / c c 0 一般而言,纖維懸臂部份549係朝向平行於第一平面之一 般方向定向,如圖30及31及圖32-41之顯微圖片概略所 示。應注意的是,雖然説纖維懸臂部份549係平行於第一 平面定向或’,延伸,,,但纖維懸臂部份549本身並不一定平 行於第一平面。如圖3 2 -4 1之顯微圖片顯示,纖維懸臂部 份549相對於第一平面可成斜角、彎曲或其他定位。同樣 地’熟諳本技藝者應了解的是,纖維結構550之纖維及高 度可撓之本質會使許多纖維懸臂部份相互不規則及非類似 定向’即使該些懸臂部份已由本發明偏向構件i 〇之相同或 類似元件形成。 根據本發明,袋560之最大水平尺寸可爲至少〇.3毫米, 在某些具體例爲至少0.7毫米,還有在某些具體例爲至少 1.1毫米而還有在其他具體例爲至少丨5毫米。如此處所 用,袋560之,,最大水平尺寸”係定義爲由垂直於第一平面 之橫切面觀看並在實質平行於第一平面測量之袋區域之最 -75- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 I、發明説明(73^^ ^ 長參數。換言之,袋560之最大水平尺寸係纖維懸臂部份 549之突出(亦即,”水平”)長度,如自枕狀物540之纖維圓 頂狀物530之邊壁543測量(圖30及3 1)。同樣要指出的是, 因爲產品之纖維及高度可撓本質,在某些具體例中,可能 很難精確畫出袋560之正確邊界,而或許需要一些近乎正 確的估計,例如,排除自纖維圓頂狀物530及/或其懸臂部 份549之質團延伸之一些個別纖維。再者,熟諳本技藝者 可輕易複製類似於圖3 2 - 4 1之顯微圖片所示之纖維結構500 之圖像,並利用以下設備進行全部必需之測量。 圖32-41所示顯微圖片係用日立(Hitachi)S-35〇〇N掃描 電子顯微鏡(SEM )以”正常模式”所拍。加速電壓設定於3 kV至5 kV以獲得明確清新圖像。放大倍數係設定在3 5 X至 5 0 X中間,以便觀看所要細節程度。全部樣本都安裝在金 屬樣本固定器上並塗覆金以供照像。樣本係安裝成可獲得 紙匹結構之橫切面圖。 圖2 6及2 7概略所示纖維結構5〇〇之一具體例具有包含實 質連續網絡之第一眾多微區域5 1〇及包含眾多枕狀物之第 二眾多微區域540。如此處所用,爲方便起見,編號540可 用於表示”第二眾多微區域,,(或”第二區域”)及枕狀物二 者。第一眾多微區域510係連續、巨大單平面並形成預選 圖案,其對應於偏向構件1 〇框構2 0之假設連續紙匹接觸面 2 1(纖維結構500在其上製成)之圖案。枕狀物54〇係分佈於 整個網絡區域中,相互之間以網絡區域隔開並自網絡區域 所形成之第一平面向外延伸。圖3 2 - 4 1顯示本發明纖維結 -76- 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ___B7 五、發明説明(74~) 構若干具體例之顯微圖片,其具有袋及包含呈實質連續網 絡形式之第一眾多微區域及眾多獨立纖維枕狀物形成之第 二眾多微區域,各包含纖維圓頂狀物部份及纖維懸臂部 份。 圖2 8所示纖維結構500之另一預言性具體例包含形成半 連續圖案之第一眾多微區域5 10及形成枕狀物540半連續圖 案之第二眾多微區域540。纖維結構5〇〇之又一預言性具體 例(未示出)包含形成獨立區域圖案之第一眾多微區域5 1〇及 形成枕狀物540實質連續圖案之第二眾多微區域54〇。 本發明之新穎纖維結構500,相對於先前技藝之同等纖維 結構,具有充分增加之表面積。所謂先前技藝之,,同等”纖 維結構係意指具有本發明結構5〇〇約略相同單位重量及整 個枕狀物圖案之先前技藝纖維結構。熟諳本技藝者將了 解,增加之表面積提供纖維結構5〇〇吸收性增加之條件。 纖維結構之表面積可如下所述估計及測量。代表第二區域 540表面積之枕狀物之剖面參數p(圖3 0),如有必要,係根 據圖3 2 - 4 1例示之纖維結構5〇〇之顯微圖片測量並作近似估 計。如此處所用,枕狀物540之,,周圍&quot;係由近似畫出個別 枕狀物540之整個構型或形狀之線所界定,如垂直於第一 平面之剖面所觀察。 在圖32-41中,熟諳本技藝者可輕易畫出一條一般畫出 一定枕狀物540構型而不管,,伸出,,之個別纖維之線。例 如,圖3 0欲意近似複製(不管比例如何)圖3 9所示枕狀物 540之構型;而圖3 1則欲意近似複製(不管比例如何)圖3 6 -77- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(75 ) 所示枕狀物540之構型。在圖30及31中,點541及542習用 於表示代表枕狀物540之周圍p之線之,,頭,,及,,尾”,而點 541與542間的距離界定枕狀物540之剖面基底b。換言之, 點541及542近似代表參數p之線與第一區域5 1〇之平面交叉 之點。然後’瞭解到所得線僅近似一定枕狀物540之橫切 面周圍P,吾人即可輕易測量代表參數p之所得線之長度以 及枕狀物540之基底B之長度。 根據本發明,枕狀物540之橫切面周圍p與相同枕狀物 540之剖面基底B之比P/B,以垂直於第一平面之橫切面所 取,爲至少4/1 ;在其他具體例爲至少6/i ;還有在其他具 體例爲至少8/ 1 ;及又在其他具體例爲至少1 〇M。因此, 本發明纖維結構500之比P/B明顯高於先前技藝結構紙者。 爲例證,圖45及46顯示本受讓人所製造且一般説明於例如 概括讓與之美國專利第4,63 7,859號之結構紙之若干代表性 具體例之圖片。在一般描繪圖4 6中所示先前技藝纖維結構 之部份之圖47中,相對低密度枕狀物區域係以640表示, 而相對高密度網絡區域則以610表示。圖4 7概略所示之先 削技藝結構之枕狀物640具有周圍pi與基底Bi。ρι/Β1比 爲約4 / 3 ’其明顯低於本發明纖維結構5〇〇之比p / b。應注 意的是,本發明之纖維結構可具有前述比,既使其纖維枕 狀物540僅包含纖維圓頂狀物部份530。如上已指出,在某 些具體例中,至少一些纖維枕狀物540可不具有懸臂部份 549 〇 本發明之纖維結構可包含層疊結構。圖43及44顯示本發 -78- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 裝 訂Since the fiber cantilever portion 549 extends laterally from the fiber dome 530 at the second height ', a plurality of pockets 560 containing a substantial void space can be formed between the first region 510 and the fiber cantilever portion 549. Therefore, the fiber cantilever portion 549 forms a portion of the first region 51 °, and a characteristic pocket 56 defined between the fiber dome 530 and the fiber cantilever portion 549 extending therefrom, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 29. -4 1 shown. Mostly due to the existence of these substantially empty bags 56, Xianxin believes that the fiber structure 500 of the present invention has extremely high absorptive characteristics in terms of a certain unit weight. The bag 560 is characterized by the absence of any or very small amounts of fibers therein. Those skilled in the art will understand that due to the method of manufacturing the fiber structure 500 as discussed below and because of the highly flexible nature of the fiber and the fiber structure 500 as a whole -74- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297) (Centi) 559632 A7 B7__ 5. Description of the invention (72) It is permissible that some individual fibers exist in the bag 560, as long as these fibers do not interfere with the design pattern of the fiber structure 500 and its expected properties. In these terms, the term "substantial void", "empty gap / bag" is intended to be recognized. Due to the highly flexible nature of the fiber structure 10 and the individual fibers containing it, some insignificant amount of fiber may be present in the bag 560. Or its part, as long as these bags 560 can be easily distinguished from the rest of the fiber structure 500, as shown in the micrographs of Fig. 3 2-41. The density of the bags 560 is not greater than 0.005 grams per cubic centimeter (g / cc), more particularly not greater than 0.004 g / cc and more particularly not greater than 0.003 g / cc 0 In general, the fiber cantilever portion 549 is oriented in a general direction parallel to the first plane, as shown in the figure The micrographs 30 and 31 and Figs. 32-41 are shown schematically. It should be noted that although the fiber cantilever portion 549 is oriented parallel to the first plane or ', extends,', the fiber cantilever portion 549 itself does not It is not necessarily parallel to the first plane. As shown in the micrograph of Figure 3 2-41, the fiber cantilever portion 549 can be angled, bent or otherwise positioned relative to the first plane. Similarly, those skilled in the art should understand What is the fiber and highly flexible nature of the fiber structure 550 Make many fiber cantilever portions mutually irregular and non-similarly oriented, even if the cantilever portions have been formed from the same or similar elements of the biasing member i 0 of the present invention. According to the present invention, the maximum horizontal dimension of the bag 560 may be at least 0.3 Millimeters, at least 0.7 millimeters in some specific examples, at least 1.1 millimeters in some specific examples, and at least 5 millimeters in other specific examples. As used herein, bag 560, the maximum horizontal dimension "is Defined as the maximum of the bag area viewed from a cross-section perpendicular to the first plane and measured substantially parallel to the first plane -75- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 I. Description of the invention (73 ^^ ^ length parameter. In other words, the maximum horizontal dimension of the bag 560 is the protruding (ie, "horizontal") length of the fiber cantilever portion 549, such as the fiber dome shape from the pillow 540 The side wall 543 of the object 530 is measured (Figures 30 and 31). It should also be noted that because of the fiber and highly flexible nature of the product, in some specific examples, it may be difficult to accurately draw the correct boundary of the bag 560. And maybe need Some near correct estimates, for example, excluding some individual fibers extending from the mass of the fiber dome 530 and / or its cantilevered portion 549. Furthermore, those skilled in the art can easily replicate similar to Figure 3 2-4 The microstructure picture 1 shows an image of the fiber structure 500, and all necessary measurements are performed using the following equipment. The micrographs shown in Figures 32-41 were taken with a Hitachi S-3500N scanning electron microscope ( SEM) was taken in "normal mode". The acceleration voltage was set at 3 kV to 5 kV to obtain a clear and fresh image. The magnification is set between 3 5 X and 50 X in order to see the desired level of detail. All samples were mounted on metal sample holders and coated with gold for imaging. The sample was mounted to obtain a cross-sectional view of the paper structure. A specific example of the fiber structure 500, which is schematically shown in Figs. 2 6 and 27, has a first plurality of micro-regions 5 10 including a solid continuous network and a second plurality of micro-regions 540 including a plurality of pillows. As used herein, for convenience, the number 540 may be used to represent both "the second plurality of micro-regions," (or "the second region") and the pillow. The first plurality of micro-regions 510 are continuous, large uniplanar and A preselected pattern is formed, which corresponds to the pattern of the hypothetical continuous paper contact surface 21 (made of the fiber structure 500) on the biasing member 10 and the frame 20. The pillows 54 are distributed throughout the network area. They are separated from each other by a network area and extend outward from the first plane formed by the network area. Figure 3 2-4 1 shows the fiber knot of the present invention-76- This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (74 ~) Photomicrographs of several specific examples of the structure, which has a bag and a first continuous micro-area in the form of a substantially continuous network and a number of independent fiber pillows The second plurality of micro-regions each include a fiber dome portion and a fiber cantilever portion. Another predictive example of the fiber structure 500 shown in FIG. 2 8 includes the first plurality of micro-regions 5 10 forming a semi-continuous pattern. And formed pillow 540 half-connected Continued pattern of the second plurality of micro-regions 540. Another predictive example (not shown) of the fibrous structure 500 includes the first plurality of micro-regions 5 10 forming the independent region pattern and the pillow 540 substantially continuous pattern The second plurality of micro-regions 54. The novel fibrous structure 500 of the present invention has a sufficiently increased surface area compared to the equivalent fibrous structure of the prior art. The so-called "equivalent" fibrous structure of the prior art means that it has the structure of the present invention 5 〇〇Previous art fiber structure with approximately the same unit weight and the entire pillow pattern. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the increased surface area provides the conditions for the 500 structure to increase absorbency. The surface area of the fibrous structure can be estimated and measured as described below. The cross-section parameter p of the pillow with a surface area of 540 in the second region (Fig. 30), if necessary, is measured and approximated according to the micrograph of the fiber structure 500 illustrated in Figs. 3 2-41. As used herein, the surroundings of the pillow 540 are defined by lines that approximately draw the entire configuration or shape of the individual pillows 540, as viewed in a section perpendicular to the first plane. In Figures 32-41, those skilled in the art can easily draw a line that generally draws a certain pillow 540 configuration regardless of the individual fibers that extend. For example, Fig. 30 intends to approximately reproduce (regardless of the scale) the configuration of the pillow 540 shown in Fig. 3; while Fig. 31 intends to approximate the reproduction (regardless of the scale) of Fig. 3 6 -77- This paper scale Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 5. The configuration of pillow 540 shown in the description of the invention (75). In Figures 30 and 31, points 541 and 542 are conventionally used to represent the line p which represents the surrounding p of pillow 540, head, and, and tail ", and the distance between points 541 and 542 defines the size of pillow 540. Section base b. In other words, points 541 and 542 approximately represent the point where the line of the parameter p intersects the plane of the first region 5 10. Then 'understand that the resulting line only approximates the surrounding P of a certain pillow 540, and we are The length of the obtained line representing the parameter p and the length of the base B of the pillow 540 can be easily measured. According to the present invention, the ratio P / B of the surrounding p of the cross section of the pillow 540 to the cross-section base B of the same pillow 540 , Taken at a cross section perpendicular to the first plane, at least 4/1; in other specific examples at least 6 / i; in other specific examples at least 8/1; and in other specific examples at least 1 OM. Therefore, the ratio P / B of the fiber structure 500 of the present invention is significantly higher than those of the prior art structure paper. As an example, Figures 45 and 46 show the present invention manufactured by the assignee and generally described in, for example, US Patent No. 4,63 7,859 are some representative concrete examples of structural paper. Figure 4 is generally depicted The part of the prior art fiber structure shown in Figure 6 is shown in Figure 47, where the relatively low-density pillow area is represented by 640, and the relatively high-density network area is represented by 610. Figure 4 7 shows the prior cut technology structure The pillow 640 has a surrounding pi and a base Bi. The ratio of ρι / Β1 is about 4/3 'which is significantly lower than the ratio p / b of 500 of the fibrous structure of the present invention. It should be noted that the fibrous structure of the present invention may be With the foregoing ratio, even if the fiber pillow 540 includes only the fiber dome portion 530. As already mentioned above, in some specific examples, at least some of the fiber pillows 540 may not have the cantilever portion 549. The present invention The fiber structure can include a laminated structure. Figures 43 and 44 show this hair-78- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) binding

559632 A7 B7_ _ 五、發明説明(76 ) 明層疊纖維結構550之二預言性具體例,每一具體例包含 疊片500a及500b。在圖42中,二個別疊片500a、500b係經 結合,使得彼等具有纖維懸臂部份549之各個枕狀物540相 互面對。咸信本發明容許吾人將各層形成具有特殊結構, 利用彼等各自之纖維懸臂部份即可結合,如圖4 3概略所 示。如此結合之各層相互之間的移動性將很有限,主要係 在橫向方向,而不撕破任何一屬或相互分離。 在先前技藝之層疊紙結構中,各疊片係堅硬結合在一起 (通常係藉黏結劑或機械方式或其組合),使得在疊層結構 使用時,形成疊層結構之個別薄片之相互運動不可能不撕 破或使個別薄片分離。因此,在使用時,當層疊結構自然 地受到彎曲、揉皺、折皺等等時,構成先前技藝層疊片之 個別薄片之堅硬連接即會影響這些層疊結構之可撓性。否 則,構成層疊結構之一或二薄片之完整性或彼等之連接便 會犧牲。不願受理論所限制,本申請人相信疊片之一或二 者之抗揉皺性(其可包括彎曲及扭曲二者)會影響先前技藝 層疊結構之可撓性。 與先前技藝相反,咸信圖4 3所示層疊結構550之個別薄 片500a、500b在消費者使用層疊結構時可相對運動而不撕 破任一薄片500a、500b或使其分離。形成層疊結構550之 個別薄片500a、500b相對運動之能力係藉在二薄片中間提 供非堅硬、可撓連接而完成,此係由於枕狀物540及彼等 纖維懸臂部份549之高度可撓性質所致。在圖4 3中,咸信 薄片500a、500b能相對運動,主要係在橫向方向。在其中 -79- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7___ 五、發明説明(77 ) 第一區域510爲實質連續之薄片中,最典型提供纖維結構 強度之第一區域5 10之完整性不會受到枕狀物540及彼等纖 維懸臂部份549之可撓性影響。同時,由於個別疊片 500a、500b之各自第一區域510不直接相互附著,當層疊 結構整個變形時,個別疊片變形之可能不等性會得到彼等 相對橫向運動補償。因此,個別薄片500a、500b間的可移 動連接可使個別疊片500a、500b之可能過度張力及/或壓力 降至最小。 概括讓與之美國專利申請案,名稱爲” Laminated Fibrous Structure and Method of Manufacturing SameM (Paul D. Trokhan ;序號08/934,406 ; 1997年9月19日提出申請; 2000年7月3日受理,· 2000年7月2 0日繳交頒發費;批號 092 )之揭示内容併於此以供參考。此一申請案敎示一種層 疊纖維結構,在使用時其中各疊片能相對運動而不撕破任 何一疊片或使其分離。疊片可藉黏合材料、藉機械接合疊 片界面表面所產生的直立纖維或藉其組合而可移動地結 合0 在圖44中,個別疊片500a、500b係經如此結合,使得彼 等具有纖維懸臂部份549之各自枕狀物540配置在層疊結構 550之外面。咸信此種結構可藉由增加層疊結構之外表面 積及使相鄰纖維圓頂狀物530及纖維懸臂部份549所形成之 袋560曝露在外,提供所得層疊結構之增強吸收性特徵。 應注意的是,可有一種層疊結構550之具體例(未示出): 即其中個別疊片之一的枕狀物面結合至與另一疊片枕狀物 -80- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 _____ B7 五、發明説明(78 ) 面相反之一面。也應注意的是,包含二疊片之層疊結構 550僅係例證性實例,而包含二疊片以上之層疊結構55〇 (未示出)也涵蓋於本發明内。 复造纖維結槿乏古法 請參閲圖42,製造本發明纖維結構500之方法之一代表 性具體例包含以下步驟。首先,提供眾多纖維501並沉積 於本發明之偏向構件1〇上。 本發明涵蓋各種纖維之使用,如造紙纖維素纖維、合成 纖維或任何其他適當纖維及其任何組合。可用於本發明之 造紙纖維包括通稱爲木漿纖維之纖維素纖維。由軟木(裸子 植物或針葉樹)及硬木(被子植物或落葉樹)衍生而得之纖維 均涵蓋於本發明内使用。衍生纖維之特殊樹種並不重要。 硬木和軟木纖維可摻混,或者可一層一層沉積以提供成層 (stratified)紙匹。美國專利第 4,300,981 號(1981 年 1 1 月 17 曰頒予Carstens)及美國專利第3,994,771號(1976年1 1月30 曰頒予Morgan等人)爲供參考其揭示硬木和軟木纖維之成 層而併於此。 木漿纖維可藉任何習知製漿方法自原木製造。化學方法 如亞硫酸鹽、硫酸鹽(包括克拉夫特(Kraft))及鹼方法皆適 合。機械方法如熱機械(或阿斯普倫德(Asplund))方法也適 合。此外,可使用各種半化學及化學-機械方法。漂白及不 漂白纖維都涵蓋於使用内。當本發明之纖維紙匹欲用於吸 收性製品如紙巾時,可使用北方軟木牛皮紙漿纖維。可用 於此處之木材紙漿包括化學紙漿如牛皮紙漿、亞硫酸鹽紙 -81 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(79 ) 漿及硫酸鹽紙漿,以及機械紙漿包括例如研碎木紙漿、熱 機械紙漿及化學-熱機械紙漿(CTMP )。可使用由落葉樹及 針葉樹衍生而得之紙漿。 除各種木漿纖維外,其他纖維素纖維如棉籽絨、嫘縈及 甘蔗渣都可用於本發明。合成纖維如聚合纖維也可使用。 彈性聚合物、聚丙烯、聚乙烯、聚酯、聚烯烴及耐綸都可 使用。聚合纖維可用纺黏方法、熔噴方法及本技藝已知其 他適當方法製造。咸信纺黏及熔噴方法製成之細長連續纖 維可有利地用於本發明之纖維結構,因爲咸信此種纖維可 輕易偏向進入本發明偏向構件之袋中。 紙供料可包含各種添加劑,包括但不限於纖維黏結劑材 料如濕強黏結劑材料、乾強黏結劑材料及化學軟化組合物 。適當濕強黏結劑包括但不限於諸如Hercules公司 (Wilmington, Del·)以商標名爲 KYMENEtm 557H 出售之聚 醯胺-表氣醇樹脂之材料。適當臨時濕強黏結劑包括但不限 於合成聚丙晞酸酯。適當臨時濕強黏結劑爲美國腈氨公司 (Stanford,Conn·)上市之PAREZTM 750。適當乾強黏結劑 包括諸如羧甲基纖維素及陽離子聚合物如ACCOTM 711之 材料。CYPRO/ACCO族之乾強材料可自CYTEC (Kalamazoo, Mich.)購得。 紙供料可包含解黏劑以在紙匹乾燥時抑制一些纖維-纖維 黏合之形成。解黏劑加上乾起皺方法賦予紙匹之能量會造 成一部份之紙匹失膨鬆。在一具體例中,解黏劑可施加至 形成固定於二或更多層中間的中間纖維層之纖維。中間層 -82- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 _____ B7 五、發明説明(80 ) 係用作爲纖維外層中間的解黏層。因此,起皺能可使沿解 黏劑之紙匹之一部份失膨鬆。適當解黏劑包括化學軟化組 合物如美國專利第5,279,767號(1994年1月1 8日頒予Phan等 人)所揭示者,該揭示内容併於此以供參考。適當生物降解 化學軟化組合物已揭示於美國專利第5,312,522號(1994年5 月17日頒予Phan等人)、美國專利第5 279 767號及 5,3 12,522號,該等專利之揭示内容併於此以供參考。此等 化學款化組合物可用作爲解黏劑以抑制構成紙匹之一層或 多層纖維中纖維與纖維之黏結。一種提供成形紙匹2 〇之一 層或多層纖維中纖維解黏之適當軟化劑爲包含DiEster Di (接觸固化)氣化牛脂二甲基銨之造紙添加劑。適當軟化劑 爲可自Witco公司(Greenwich, Conn.)購得之ADOGEN®牌造 紙添加劑。 胚紙匹一般可自含水造紙纖維分散液製備,雖然可使用 水以外的液體分散液。纖維係分散於載體液體中至濃度約 〇· 1至約0.3百分比。或者且不受理論所約束,咸信本發明 適用於纖維分散於載體液體中至濃度低於約5 〇百分比之濕 成形作業。在另一替代具體例中且不受理論所約束,咸信 本發明也適用於氣流成網(airlaid)結構,包括包含紙漿纖 維、合成纖維及其混合物之氣流成網紙匹。 可使用習知造紙纖維,且含水分散液可以習知方法形 成 白知&amp;紙$又備及方法可用以在長網(Fourdrinier wire) 上形成胚紙匹。胚紙匹與偏向構件之結合可藉在二移動無 端帶中間輔以差別流體壓力簡單轉移而完成。纖維可藉施 -83- 本紙張尺度1£用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 559632 A7 ____B7 五、發明説明(81 ~~) &quot; 一 ' 加由施加之眞空所謗發之差別流體壓力而偏向進入偏向構 件1 〇中。任何技術,如楊基烘罐之使用,可用以乾燥中間 紙匹。皺縮(foreshortening)可藉任何習知技術如起皺完成。 眾多纖維也可以濕潤纖維紙匹(未示出)之形式供應;該 濕潤纖維紙匹較佳應在部份紙匹可有效偏向進入偏向構件 之偏向導管及懸吊部份與χ-γ平面所形成之空隙空間中之 狀況下。 在圖42中,包含纖維501之胚紙匹係藉眞空拾取鞋18a由 成形網轉移至偏向構件1 0。或者或另外,眾多纖維,或纖 維於漿,可由流料箱或其他裝置直接沉積於偏向構件i 〇 (未示出)。呈無端帶形式之偏向構件1 〇係以箭頭” B ”概略 所示的方向繞輥 19a、19b、19k、19c、19d、19e 及 19f 行進。 然後,一部份之纖維501即偏向進入偏向構件i〇之偏向 部份中以使一些偏向之纖維或其一部份配置在偏向構件i 〇 之懸吊部份4 9所形成之空隙空間内。視方法而定,可利用 機械以及流體壓力差,單獨或聯合,以使一部份之纖維 501偏向進入偏向構件之偏向導管中。例如,在圖42所示 之通風乾燥方法中,眞空裝置181)將流體壓力差施加至配 置在偏向構件1 〇上之胚紙匹,而使纖維偏向進入偏向構件 ίο之偏向導管中。偏向之過程在另一眞空裝置i8c施加額 外眞空壓力以進一步使纖維偏向進入偏向構件1〇之偏向導 管時可繼續。根據本發明,一部份之偏向纖維係配置在框 構2 0之懸吊部份4 9與其背面2 2或補強元件5 0所形成之平 -84 - 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CMS) A4規格(210X297公复) 裝 訂559632 A7 B7_ _ V. Description of the invention (76) Demonstrates specific prophetic examples of the laminated fiber structure 550bis, each of which includes laminated sheets 500a and 500b. In Fig. 42, two individual laminations 500a, 500b are combined so that each pillow 540 having a fiber cantilever portion 549 faces each other. The letter of the present invention allows us to form each layer with a special structure, which can be combined using their respective fiber cantilever portions, as shown schematically in Figure 43. The mobility of the layers thus combined will be limited, mainly in the transverse direction, without tearing any one of the genera or separated from each other. In the laminated paper structure of the prior art, the laminations are rigidly bonded together (usually by an adhesive or mechanical means or a combination thereof), so that when the laminated structure is used, the mutual movement of the individual sheets forming the laminated structure is not May not tear or separate individual sheets. Therefore, when the laminated structures are naturally subjected to bending, wrinkling, wrinkling, etc. during use, the rigid connection of the individual sheets constituting the laminated sheet of the prior art will affect the flexibility of these laminated structures. Otherwise, the integrity or connection of one or two sheets constituting the laminated structure will be sacrificed. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the applicant believes that the wrinkle resistance (which may include both bending and twisting) of one or both of the laminates will affect the flexibility of the prior art laminated structure. In contrast to the prior art, individual sheets 500a, 500b of the laminated structure 550 shown in FIG. 43 can be moved relative to each other without tearing or separating any of the sheets 500a, 500b when the consumer uses the laminated structure. The ability of the relative movement of the individual sheets 500a, 500b forming the laminated structure 550 is accomplished by providing a non-rigid, flexible connection between the two sheets. This is due to the highly flexible nature of the pillow 540 and their fiber cantilever portions 549. Caused by. In Fig. 43, the Xianxin sheets 500a, 500b can move relatively, mainly in the transverse direction. Among them -79- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7___ V. Description of the invention (77) The first area 510 is a substantially continuous sheet, which provides the most typical fiber structure The integrity of the first region 5 10 of strength is not affected by the flexibility of the pillows 540 and their fiber cantilever portions 549. At the same time, since the respective first regions 510 of the individual laminations 500a, 500b are not directly attached to each other, when the laminated structure is completely deformed, the possible inequality of the deformation of the individual laminations will be compensated for their relative lateral motion. Therefore, the movable connection between the individual sheets 500a, 500b can minimize the possible excessive tension and / or pressure of the individual sheets 500a, 500b. A summary of the assigned US patent application, entitled "Laminated Fibrous Structure and Method of Manufacturing SameM (Paul D. Trokhan; Serial No. 08 / 934,406; filed on September 19, 1997; accepted on July 3, 2000, · 2000 Payment of the issuance fee on July 20, 2009; batch number 092) is hereby disclosed for reference. This application shows a laminated fiber structure in which the laminated sheets can move relative to each other without tearing any A lamination or separation of laminations. Laminations can be movably combined by bonding materials, by mechanically joining upright fibers generated on the lamination interface surface, or by a combination thereof. In Figure 44, individual laminations 500a, 500b are This combination allows their respective pillows 540 with fiber cantilever portions 549 to be disposed outside the laminated structure 550. This structure can increase the outer surface area of the laminated structure and make adjacent fiber domes 530 The bag 560 formed by the fiber cantilever portion 549 is exposed to provide enhanced absorption characteristics of the obtained laminated structure. It should be noted that there may be a specific example (not shown) of the laminated structure 550: that is, its The pillow surface of one of the individual laminations is combined with the other lamination pillow -80- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (78) The other side is opposite. It should also be noted that the laminated structure 550 including two laminated sheets is only an illustrative example, and the laminated structure 55 (not shown) including two or more laminated sheets is also included in the present invention. Please refer to FIG. 42. A representative specific example of a method for manufacturing the fiber structure 500 of the present invention includes the following steps. First, a plurality of fibers 501 are provided and deposited on the biasing member 10 of the present invention. The present invention covers the use of various fibers, such as papermaking cellulose fibers, synthetic fibers or any other suitable fibers and any combination thereof. Papermaking fibers useful in the present invention include cellulose fibers commonly known as wood pulp fibers. Or coniferous trees) and hardwood (angiosperms or deciduous trees) are derived from the fiber used in the present invention. The specific tree species from which the fibers are derived are not important. Hardwood and softwood fibers can be blended Or it can be deposited layer by layer to provide stratified paper. US Patent No. 4,300,981 (issued to Carstens on November 17, 1981) and US Patent No. 3,994,771 (issued to Morgan et al. On January 30, 1976) (People) is here for reference to reveal the layering of hardwood and softwood fibers. Wood pulp fibers can be made from logs by any conventional pulping method. Chemical methods such as sulfite, sulfate (including Kraft) ) And alkaline methods are suitable. Mechanical methods such as thermomechanical (or Asplund) methods are also suitable. In addition, various semi-chemical and chemical-mechanical methods can be used. Both bleached and unbleached fibers are covered. When the fibrous paper of the present invention is intended for use in absorbent articles such as paper towels, northern softwood kraft pulp fibers can be used. Wood pulp that can be used here includes chemical pulp such as kraft pulp, sulfite paper -81-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (79) Pulp and sulfate pulp, and mechanical pulp include, for example, ground wood pulp, thermomechanical pulp, and chemical-thermomechanical pulp (CTMP). Pulp derived from deciduous and coniferous trees can be used. In addition to various wood pulp fibers, other cellulosic fibers such as cotton seed velvet, loquat, and bagasse can be used in the present invention. Synthetic fibers such as polymeric fibers can also be used. Elastic polymers, polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyolefins, and nylon can be used. Polymeric fibers can be made by the spunbond method, meltblown method, and other suitable methods known in the art. The slender continuous fibers made by the Xianxin spunbond and meltblown methods can be advantageously used in the fiber structure of the present invention because such fibers can be easily biased into the bag of the biasing member of the present invention. The paper feed may contain various additives including, but not limited to, fiber cement materials such as wet strength cement materials, dry strength cement materials, and chemical softening compositions. Suitable wet-strength adhesives include, but are not limited to, materials such as polyamide-epihydrin resins sold by the company Hercules (Wilmington, Del.) Under the trade name KYMENEtm 557H. Suitable temporary wet strength adhesives include, but are not limited to, synthetic polypropionates. A suitable temporary wet-strength adhesive is PAREZTM 750 marketed by Stanford, Conn. Suitable dry and strong binders include materials such as carboxymethyl cellulose and cationic polymers such as ACCOTM 711. Dry strength materials of the CYPRO / ACCO family are commercially available from CYTEC (Kalamazoo, Mich.). The paper feed may contain a debinding agent to inhibit the formation of some fiber-fiber bonds when the paper is dry. The energy imparted to the paper by the debonding agent and the dry creping method can cause a portion of the paper to lose bulk. In a specific example, a debonding agent may be applied to the fibers forming an intermediate fiber layer fixed in the middle of two or more layers. Intermediate layer -82- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (80) It is used as the debonding layer in the middle of the outer layer of the fiber. Therefore, wrinkling can cause a portion of the paper along the debonding agent to lose bulk. Suitable detackifiers include chemically softening compositions such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,279,767 (issued January 18, 1994 to Phan et al.), The disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Appropriate biodegradable chemical softening compositions have been disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,312,522 (issued to Phan et al. On May 17, 1994), U.S. Patent Nos. 5 279 767 and 5,3 12,522, the disclosures of these patents and For reference. These chemically modified compositions can be used as debonding agents to inhibit fiber-to-fiber adhesion in one or more layers of fibers constituting the paper. A suitable softener that provides fiber debinding in one or more layers of shaped paper is a papermaking additive containing DiEster Di (contact curing) vaporized tallow dimethylammonium. A suitable softener is an ADOGEN® brand papermaking additive commercially available from Witco (Greenwich, Conn.). Base paper can generally be prepared from aqueous papermaking fiber dispersions, although liquid dispersions other than water can be used. The fiber system is dispersed in the carrier liquid to a concentration of about 0.1 to about 0.3 percent. Or, without being bound by theory, the present invention is applicable to wet forming operations where fibers are dispersed in a carrier liquid to a concentration of less than about 50 percent. In another alternative embodiment and not bound by theory, the invention is also applicable to airlaid structures, including airlaid papers comprising pulp fibers, synthetic fibers, and mixtures thereof. Conventional papermaking fibers can be used, and aqueous dispersions can be formed in a conventional manner. White papers and methods can be used to form embryonic paper on a fourdrinier wire. The combination of the embryo paper and the biasing member can be accomplished by simply transferring the differential fluid pressure in the middle of the two moving endless belts. Fiber can be used -83- This paper size 1 £ uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 559632 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (81 ~~) &quot; One 'plus by the imposed empty space The differential fluid pressure is biased into the biasing member 10. Any technique, such as the use of a Yankee oven, can be used to dry the intermediate paper. Foreshortening can be accomplished by any conventional technique such as wrinkling. Many fibers can also be supplied in the form of a wet fiber paper (not shown); the wet fiber paper should preferably be partially deflected into the deflection duct and the hanging part of the deflection member and the χ-γ plane. Under the condition of the formed void space. In Fig. 42, the blank paper containing the fibers 501 is transferred from the forming wire to the deflection member 10 by the empty pickup shoe 18a. Alternatively or in addition, a plurality of fibers, or fibers, may be deposited directly on the deflection member i 0 (not shown) by a headbox or other device. The deflection member 10 in the form of an endless belt travels around the rollers 19a, 19b, 19k, 19c, 19d, 19e, and 19f in a direction generally indicated by an arrow "B". Then, a part of the fibers 501 is deflected into the deflected part of the deflected member i0 so that some deflected fibers or a part thereof is arranged in the void space formed by the suspended part 49 of the deflected member i 0 . Depending on the method, mechanical and fluid pressure differences can be used alone or in combination to bias a portion of the fiber 501 into the deflection duct of the deflection member. For example, in the air-drying method shown in FIG. 42, the hollowing device 181) applies a fluid pressure difference to the embryonic papers arranged on the deflection member 10, and deflects the fibers into the deflection duct of the deflection member ο. The deflection process can be continued when another hollowing device i8c exerts additional hollowing pressure to further deflect the fibers into the deflection duct of the deflection member 10. According to the present invention, a part of the bias fiber is arranged in the suspension portion 4 9 of the frame 20 and the back surface 22 or the reinforcing element 50 is formed to be flat -84-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CMS ) A4 size (210X297 public copy) binding

k 559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(82 ) 面間的空隙空間内,如上述。 纖維偏向進入本發明偏向構件10之偏向導管内之步驟可 利用概括讓與之美國專利第5,893,965號( 1999年4月13日以 Tirokhan等人名義頒予)所揭示之方法有利地完成;該專利 之揭示内容併於此以供參考。根據此一方法,配置在偏向 構件上的紙匹係以可撓材料片覆蓋,使得紙匹係配置在材 料片與偏向構件中間,如圖54概略所示。材料片之透氣度 小於偏向構件者。在一具體例中,材料片係不透氣。施加 &gt;荒體壓力差於材料片會使至少一部份之材料片偏向偏向構 件而因此使至少一部份之紙匹偏向進入造紙帶之導管中。 咸信此一方法若和具有由懸吊部份所形成之空隙空間之 本發明偏向構件1 0使用時可特別有利。用於製造纖維結構 500之本發明方法,特別是和不透流體之可撓片或具相當 低透氣性之材料片使用時,咸信可讓吾人施加偏向壓力而 不在建構中的纖維結構產生針孔。針孔會在一定量的纖維 在施加流體壓力差時通過偏向構件。壓力愈高,一些纖維 自纖維結構分離及通過偏向構件之風險愈高,從而在纖維 結構中產生針孔。不透流體片可防止此種情形發生。同 時,高偏向壓力將促進纖維更會偏向進入偏向構件ι〇之偏 向導管及空隙空間内,如圖54概略所示,其中覆蓋在眾多 纖維上面之可撓材料片係以編號6〇〇表示。 最後,與偏向構件10結合之半成形纖維結構可自偏向構 件10分離以形成本發明之纖維結構5〇〇。 此方法可進一步包含以下步驟’即將其中具有纖維之偏 -85-k 559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (82) In the interstitial space between the faces, as described above. The step of deflection of the fibers into the deflection duct of the deflection member 10 of the present invention can be advantageously performed using the method disclosed in US Patent No. 5,893,965 (issued on April 13, 1999 in the name of Tirokhan et al.), Which is generally assigned; the patent; The disclosure content is here for reference. According to this method, the paper system disposed on the deflection member is covered with the flexible material sheet, so that the paper system is disposed between the material sheet and the deflection member, as schematically shown in Fig. 54. The air permeability of the material sheet is less than that of the deflection member. In a specific example, the sheet of material is airtight. Applying &gt; the pressure difference of the waste body to the material sheet will deflect at least a part of the material sheet toward the deflection member and thus deflect at least a part of the paper into the duct of the papermaking belt. It is believed that this method can be particularly advantageous when used with the biasing member 10 of the present invention having a void space formed by the suspended portion. The method of the present invention for manufacturing a fibrous structure 500, especially when used with a fluid-impermeable flexible sheet or a material sheet having a relatively low air permeability, the letter allows us to apply biasing pressure without generating needles in the fibrous structure under construction. hole. A pinhole will pass through a deflection member when a certain amount of fiber applies a fluid pressure differential. The higher the pressure, the higher the risk that some fibers will separate from the fiber structure and pass through the deflection member, creating pinholes in the fiber structure. A fluid-tight sheet prevents this from happening. At the same time, high deflection pressure will promote the fibers to deviate into the deflection ducts and void spaces of the deflection member ι0, as shown schematically in Fig. 54. The flexible material sheet covering the plurality of fibers is denoted by the number 600. Finally, the semi-shaped fiber structure combined with the deflection member 10 can be separated from the deflection member 10 to form the fiber structure 500 of the present invention. This method may further include the following step ’, i.e. having a fiber bias in it -85-

559632 A7 B7 五、發明説明(84 ) WI ·)製造。 利用如上所述”41/9”偏向構件1〇,根據修正TAPPI手抄 紙方法製造手抄紙。手抄紙包含8〇%NSK(北方軟木牛皮紙 裝)、I8% CTMP(化學-熱-機械紙漿)及2%有加利樹紙漿。 紙衆係用TAPPI標準分解並稀釋以產生控制之單位重量J 3 砖/3000平方呎(2小時,7(rc及5〇% rh下)。手抄紙係在 本發明之41/9偏向構件1〇上直接形成、抽眞空及乾燥。一 俟乾燥,即將手抄紙剝離偏向構件1〇。此處圖32·4ι所複 製之若干顯微圖片即顯示這些手抄紙之橫切面構型。 -87- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐)559632 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (84) WI ·) Manufacturing. Using the "41/9" biasing member 10 as described above, handsheets were manufactured according to the modified TAPPI handsheet method. Handmade paper contains 80% NSK (Northern Softwood Kraft), I8% CTMP (Chemical-Thermo-Mechanical Pulp) and 2% Gary Tree Pulp. The paper is decomposed and diluted with the TAPPI standard to produce a controlled unit weight of J 3 bricks / 3000 square feet (2 hours, 7 (at rc and 50% rh). The hand-made paper is a 41/9 biasing member 1 of the present invention. 〇 directly formed, emptied and dried. Once dried, the handsheet is peeled off the deflection member 10. Several micrographs reproduced here in Figure 32 · 4ι show the cross-section configuration of these handsheets. -87- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

^9p3y:^ 9p3y: :6284號專利申請案 干文申請專利範圍替換本(92年6月) A Be D 、申請專利範圍 •一種包含至少一第一區域(510)及一第二區域(WO)之纖 維結構(500),該至少一第一區域(5 1〇)具有第一高度並 界定第一平面,而該至少一第二區域(54〇)包含自第一平 面向外延伸以界定第二高度之眾多枕狀物, 違纖維結構之特徵為眾多纖維枕狀物包含纖維圓頂狀 物(530)及自圓頂狀物(530)在第二高度橫向延伸之纖維 懸臂部份(549)以在第一區域與懸吊部份之間形成實質空 袋(560) 〇 2.如申請專利範圍第1項之纖維結構(5〇〇),其中至少該第 一區域(510)及第二區域(54〇)其中之一包含實質連續且 巨大單平面網絡區域、眾多半連續區域、眾多獨立區域 或其任何組合。 3·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之纖維結構(5〇〇 ),其中在垂直 於第一平面之至少一橫切面中,第二區域(54〇)之個別纖 維枕狀物具有在第一高度及橫切面周圍(P)測得之橫切面 基底(B), 該纖維結構之特徵為至少一些枕狀物之橫切面周圍(p ) 與該至少一些枕狀物之橫切面基底(B)之比(P/B)為大於 4/1 〇 4.如申請專利範圍第1或2項之纖維結構(5〇〇 ),其中第一區 域(510)之密度大於第二區域(54〇)之密度或其中第二區 域(540)之單位重量大於第一區域(51〇)之單位重量。 5·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之纖維結構(500 ),其中個別纖 維枕狀物包含自第一區域向外延伸之纖維圓頂狀物, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) ^%32: No. 6284 patent application stem text application patent scope replacement version (June 1992) A Be D, patent application scope • a fiber structure (500 including at least a first region (510) and a second region (WO) ), The at least one first region (51) has a first height and defines a first plane, and the at least one second region (54) includes a plurality of pillows extending outward from the first plane to define a second height The fiber structure is characterized by a plurality of fiber pillows including a fiber dome (530) and a fiber cantilever portion (549) extending laterally from the dome (530) at a second height to form a first A substantially empty bag (560) is formed between the area and the suspension part. 2. As the fiber structure (500) of the first scope of the patent application, at least the first area (510) and the second area (54) ) One of them includes a substantially continuous and huge single-plane network area, many semi-continuous areas, many independent areas, or any combination thereof. 3. The fibrous structure (500) of item 1 or 2 of the patent application scope, wherein in at least one cross-section perpendicular to the first plane, the individual fiber pillows of the second region (54) have A cross-section base (B) measured at a height and around the cross-section (P), the fiber structure is characterized by the cross-section base (p) of at least some pillows and the cross-section base (B) of the at least some pillows ) Ratio (P / B) is greater than 4/1 04. For the fibrous structure (500) of the first or second scope of the patent application, the density of the first region (510) is greater than that of the second region (54). ) Or the unit weight of the second region (540) is greater than the unit weight of the first region (540). 5. If the fiber structure (500) of the scope of the application for patents (500), where individual fiber pillows include fiber domes extending outward from the first area, this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210X 297 mm) ^% 32 該纖維結構之進一步特徵為枕狀物包含自纖維圓頂狀 =橫向延伸之纖維懸臂部份,該纖維懸臂部份包含具有 介於第一區域(510)高密度與第二區域(540)低密度之間 的中間密度之第三區域。 6·—種包含至少第一疊片(5〇〇a)及第二疊片(5〇〇b)接合在 —起的層疊纖維結構,The fiber structure is further characterized in that the pillow comprises a fiber cantilever portion extending from the fiber dome shape = transversely, the fiber cantilever portion includes a high density between the first region (510) and the second region (540). A third region of intermediate density between densities. 6. · A laminated fiber structure including at least a first lamination (500a) and a second lamination (500b) joined together, 該層疊纖維結構之特徵為至少第一疊片(5〇〇a)包含具 有至少二區域之纖維結構(5〇〇): 具有第一高度並界定第一平面之第一區域(510),及 自第一平面向外延伸以界定第二高度之第二區域 (=54〇),其中第二區域(54〇)包含纖維圓頂狀物(530)及自 該纖維圓頂狀物(530)在第二高度向外延伸之纖維懸臂部 份(549)。 7.如申請專利範圍第6項之纖維結構,其中第二疊片⑼叫 包含具有至少二區域之纖維結構(5〇〇)及包含具有第一高 度及界定第一平面之第一區域(510),及自第一平面向外 延伸以界定第=高度之第二區域(54〇),纟中第二區域 (54J))包含纖維圓頂狀物(53〇)及自該纖維圓頂狀物(5川) 在第二高度向外延伸之纖維懸臂部份(549)以在第一平面 與纖維懸臂部份之間形成袋(5 6〇), 該層叠纖維結構之特徵為[叠片(跡)之纖維懸臂 部份(549)係配置在第二疊片(5〇〇b)之懸臂部份與第二平 面之間所形成之袋(560)中,以使第一疊片與第二叠片可 移動地接合在—起,俾第—與第二叠片可在至少-橫向 • 2 - 559632 A8 B8 C8 --— —_ D8 、申請專利範圍 方向相對移動而該等疊片不撕破或不分離。 8· —種製造具有至少二區域以非無規重複圖案配置之纖維 結構(500)之方法,此方法包含以下步驟: 提供其中具有偏向導管之偏向構件(10); 提供眾多纖維,較佳自造紙纖維素纖維、合成纖維或 其任何組合所組成之族群中選出; 將眾多纖維沉積於偏向構件(1〇)上面; 較佳藉由施加流體壓力差至眾多纖維,使眾多纖維之 一部份偏向進入偏向導管中,藉以形成纖維結構, 此方法之特徵為在提供偏向構件(10)之步驟中,偏向 構件(10)包含接合至補強元件(50)並自其延伸之眾多基 底(30)及自眾多基底(30)橫向延伸並與補強元件(5〇)隔 開,以在補強元件(5 0)與懸吊部份(4 9)之間形成空隙空 間之眾多懸吊部份(49);及在使眾多纖維之一部份偏向 之步驟中,該部份之纖維係偏向進入偏向導管中,以使 一些偏向之纖維或其部份配置在該空隙空間内,藉以形 成包含纖維圓頂狀物(530)及自纖維圓頂狀物(53〇)橫向 延伸之纖維懸臂部份(549)之眾多枕狀物(53〇),其中纖 維圓頂狀物(5 3 0)係由偏向進入偏向導管之纖維所形成, 而纖維懸臂部份(549)則由偏向進入補強元件(5 〇 )與懸吊 部份(4 9)之間所形成之空隙空間内之纖維所形成。 9·如申請專利範圍第8項之方法,尚包含將其上具有纖維結 構之偏向構件(10)壓在壓緊表面上,藉以使部份之纖維 結構緻密化之步驟。 -3- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210x297公釐) 559632 A8 B8 C8The laminated fibrous structure is characterized in that at least the first laminated sheet (500a) comprises a fibrous structure (500) having at least two regions: a first region (510) having a first height and defining a first plane, and A second region (= 54) extending outward from the first plane to define a second height, wherein the second region (54) includes a fiber dome (530) and a fiber dome (530) A cantilever portion of the fiber extending outward at the second height (549). 7. The fibrous structure according to item 6 of the patent application scope, wherein the second laminated sheet includes a fibrous structure (500) having at least two regions and a first region (510 having a first height and defining a first plane) ), And a second area (54 °) extending outward from the first plane to define the third height, the second area (54J) in the middle includes a fiber dome (53〇) and a fiber dome (5 川) A fiber cantilever portion (549) extending outward at the second height to form a pocket (56) between the first plane and the fiber cantilever portion. The laminated fiber structure is characterized by [laminate The fiber cantilever portion (549) of the (trace) is arranged in a bag (560) formed between the cantilever portion of the second laminated sheet (500b) and the second plane, so that the first laminated sheet and the The second lamination can be movably joined together—the first and second laminations can be moved at least-laterally • 2-559632 A8 B8 C8 --- —_ D8, the relative scope of the patent application and the laminations Does not tear or separate. 8 · — A method for manufacturing a fiber structure (500) having at least two regions arranged in a non-random repeating pattern, the method includes the following steps: providing a biasing member (10) having a biasing duct therein; providing a plurality of fibers, preferably from Selected from the group consisting of papermaking cellulose fibers, synthetic fibers, or any combination thereof; depositing a plurality of fibers on the deflection member (10); preferably applying a fluid pressure difference to the plurality of fibers to make part of the plurality of fibers The deflection enters the deflection duct to form a fibrous structure. The method is characterized in that in the step of providing the deflection member (10), the deflection member (10) includes a plurality of substrates (30) joined to and extending from the reinforcing element (50) And a plurality of suspended portions (49) extending laterally from the plurality of bases (30) and separated from the reinforcing element (50) to form a void space between the reinforcing element (50) and the suspended portion (49). ); And in the step of deflecting a part of the plurality of fibers, the fibers of the part are deflected into the deflection duct so that some of the deflected fibers or parts thereof are disposed in the void space, To form a plurality of pillows (53) including a fiber dome (530) and a fiber cantilever portion (549) extending laterally from the fiber dome (53), wherein the fiber dome (5 3 0) is formed by the fiber deviating into the deflection duct, and the fiber cantilever portion (549) is deviated into the void space formed between the reinforcing element (50) and the suspension portion (49). Formed by fibers. 9. The method according to item 8 of the scope of patent application, further comprising the step of pressing a deflection member (10) having a fibrous structure thereon onto a compacted surface to densify a part of the fibrous structure. -3- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297 mm) 559632 A8 B8 C8 10·如申請專利範圍第8或9項之方法,其中提供偏向構件 步驟包含提供包含至少二層以面對面關係接合在 一起的偏向構件,其中眾多基底(30)係由一層所形成, 而眾多懸吊部份(49)則由另一層所形成,及其中至少— 層包含眾多獨立開孔分散於整體之實質連續圖案、半連 續圖案、眾多獨立突出物所形成之圖案或其任何組合。 11· 一種偏向構件(10),包含: 具有紙匹面(21)及與紙匹面(21)相反之背面(22)並界 疋X-Y平面之有圖案、較佳可透流體框構(20),其中框 構(20)包含自X-Y平面在垂直於χ_γ平面之z-方向延伸 之眾多基底(30), 該偏向構件之特徵為框構(2〇〇)包含眾多懸吊部份 (49) ’其自眾多基底橫向延伸並在ζ_方向自χ_γ平面升 高以在X - Υ平面與懸吊部份(4 9 )之間形成空隙空間。 12·如申請專利範圍第丨丨項之偏向構件(丨〇 ),該偏向構件之 特徵為框構(2 0)之至少紙匹面(2 1)及背面(2 2)之一包含 具有眾多獨立開孔分散於整體之實質連續圖案、半連續 圖案、眾多獨立突出物所形成之圖案或其任何組合。 13·如申請專利範圍第1 i或12項之偏向構件(1〇),其特徵為 框構(2 0)包含由至少二層以面對面關係接合在一起所形 成之多層結構,其中眾多基底係由第一層(3 〇)所形成而 眾多懸吊部份(4 9)則由第二層(40)所形成,第一及第二 層(30、40)各具有上表面(31、41)、與上表面(31、41) 相反之底表面(32、42)及在上與底表面之間的z -方向延 -4- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 559632 ABCD 六、申請專利範圍 伸之至少一偏向導管(35、45),第一層(3〇)之底表面 (3 2)形成框構(2 0)之背面(22)而第二層(4〇)之上表面 (4 1)則形成框構(2 0)之紙匹面(21)。 14.如申請專利範圍第i !或丨2項之偏向構件,尚包含固定在 框構(2 0 )之紙匹面(2 1 )與至少一部份背面(2 2)之間而較 佳在第一層(3〇)之上表面(31)與至少一部份背面(22)之 間的補強元件(5 0), 該偏向構件之特徵為眾多懸吊部份(4 9)係自補強元件 (5 0)升高以在補強元件(5 〇)與懸吊部份(4 9 )之間形成空 隙空間,其中補強元件(50)係可透流體且較佳包含編織 元件、氈或其組合。 15·—種製造偏向構件(1〇)之方法,包含提供具有上表面(31) 及與上表面(31)相反之底表面(32)並界定χ-γ平面之第 一層(30),該第一層(30)尚具有在上與底表面(η、32) 之間延伸之可透流體第一導管部份(35),該方法之特徵 為包含以下步驟: 提供具有上表面(41)、與上表面相反之底表面(42)及 在上與底表面(41、42)之間延伸的第二導管(45)之第二 層(40),及 將第一層(30)與第二層(40)以面對面關係接合在一 起,使得第一層(30)之上表面(31)面對第二層之底表面 (42),其中對應於第一層(3〇)之第一導管部份(35)之第 二層(4 0)之部份(4 9)係與X-Y平面隔開以在χ-γ平面與 第二層(40)之該部份(49)之間形成空隙空間。 -5· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(21GX297公⑹ 一 ------------— 559632 A8 B8 C8 —----------- D8___ 六、申請專利範圍 16.如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,其特徵為至少第一層 (3 0)與第二層(4〇)之一係由選擇地使光敏樹脂硬化而製 成’而至少第一層(3〇)上表面(31)及第二層(40)底表面 (4 2)之一係維持於部份未硬化之情況下以能使第一層及 弟一層在接觸後接合在一起。 Π· —種用於硬化可硬化材料之方法之掩模(110),該掩模包 含具有上面(ll〇a)及與上面(110a)相反之底面(1101))之 結構’掩模(110)進一步具有透明區域(112)及不透明區 域(114)之非無規及重複圖案, 該掩模之特徵為不透明區域(丨14)包含至少第一不透明 區域(114a)及第二不透明區域(114b),其中第一不透明 區域(114a)具有第一不透明度,而第二不透明區域(n 4b) 具有不同於第一不透明度之第二不透明度。 18.如申請專利範圍第17項之掩模(11〇),其特徵為第一不透 明區域(114a)形成眾多獨立區域之不連續圖案、半連續 圖案、獨立區域之圖案或其任何組合。 19·如申請專利範圍第17或18項之掩模(11〇),其特徵為不 透明區域(114 )包含在至少一方向漸次變化之梯度不透明 度。 20·如申請專利範圍第1 7項或丨8項之掩模(丨1〇),其特徵為 掩模包含三維度外形(115)之圖案,其包含自掩模(丨1〇) 至少上表面(ll〇a)及底面(ll〇b)之一延伸之突出物及包 含實質連續圖案、實質半連續圖案、獨立突出物圖案或 其任何組合,其中突出物(115)之圖案較佳與透明區域 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 559632 8 8 8 8 A B c D 六、申請專利範園 (112)及不透明區域(114)之圖案相連合以形成合併非無 規及重複圖案。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)10. The method of claim 8 or 9, wherein the step of providing a biasing member includes providing a biasing member including at least two layers joined together in a face-to-face relationship, wherein a plurality of bases (30) are formed by one layer, and a plurality of suspension members The hanging part (49) is formed by another layer, and at least one of the layers includes a substantially continuous pattern, a semi-continuous pattern, a plurality of independent protrusions, or any combination thereof. 11. A deflection member (10), comprising: a patterned, preferably fluid-permeable frame (20) having a paper surface (21) and a back surface (22) opposite the paper surface (21) and defining an XY plane ), Wherein the frame structure (20) includes a plurality of bases (30) extending from the XY plane in the z-direction perpendicular to the χ_γ plane, and the deflection member is characterized by the frame structure (200) including a plurality of suspension parts (49 ) 'It extends laterally from many substrates and rises from the χ_γ plane in the ζ_ direction to form a void space between the X-Υ plane and the hanging portion (49). 12. · If the biased component (丨 〇) of the scope of application for patent application, the biased component is characterized by at least one of the paper surface (2 1) and the back surface (2 2) of the frame structure (20). Independent continuous openings are dispersed throughout the entire substantially continuous pattern, semi-continuous pattern, pattern formed by many independent protrusions, or any combination thereof. 13. The biasing member (10) according to item 1i or 12 of the scope of patent application, characterized in that the frame structure (20) includes a multilayer structure formed by joining together at least two layers in a face-to-face relationship, among which many substrates are It is formed by the first layer (30) and many suspension parts (49) are formed by the second layer (40). The first and second layers (30, 40) each have an upper surface (31, 41). ), The bottom surface (32, 42) opposite to the top surface (31, 41), and the z-direction extension between the top and bottom surfaces -4- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297) (Centi) 559632 ABCD VI. At least one deflection duct (35, 45) extending the scope of patent application, the bottom surface (32) of the first layer (30) forms the back surface (22) of the frame (20) and the second layer (40) The upper surface (41) forms the paper surface (21) of the frame (20). 14. If the biasing member of item i! Or 丨 2 of the scope of patent application, it still preferably includes between the paper surface (2 1) fixed to the frame structure (20) and at least a part of the back surface (22) The reinforcing element (50) between the upper surface (31) of the first layer (30) and at least a part of the back surface (22), the biasing member is characterized by a large number of suspension parts (49) from The reinforcing element (50) is raised to form a void space between the reinforcing element (50) and the suspension portion (49), wherein the reinforcing element (50) is fluid-permeable and preferably comprises a knitted element, felt or Its combination. 15 · —A method for manufacturing a biasing member (10), comprising providing a first layer (30) having an upper surface (31) and a bottom surface (32) opposite to the upper surface (31) and defining a χ-γ plane, The first layer (30) also has a fluid-permeable first duct portion (35) extending between the upper and lower surfaces (η, 32). The method is characterized by comprising the following steps: providing the upper surface (41 ), A bottom surface (42) opposite to the upper surface, a second layer (40) of the second duct (45) extending between the upper and bottom surfaces (41, 42), and the first layer (30) and The second layer (40) is joined together in a face-to-face relationship so that the upper surface (31) of the first layer (30) faces the bottom surface (42) of the second layer, where the first layer (30) corresponds to the first layer (30). A part (49) of the second layer (40) of a duct part (35) is separated from the XY plane to be between the χ-γ plane and the part (49) of the second layer (40) Form void space. -5 · This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (21GX297) ------------ 559632 A8 B8 C8 —----------- D8___ 6. Scope of applying for patent 16. The method according to item 15 of the scope of applying for patent, characterized in that at least one of the first layer (30) and the second layer (40) is made by selectively curing the photosensitive resin 'And at least one of the upper surface (31) of the first layer (30) and the bottom surface (4 2) of the second layer (40) is maintained in a partially unhardened condition so that the first layer and the first layer can Bonded together after contact. Π · —A mask (110) for a method for hardening a hardenable material, the mask comprising a top surface (110a) and a bottom surface (1101) opposite to the top surface (110a)). The structure 'mask (110) further has a non-random and repeating pattern of transparent regions (112) and opaque regions (114). The mask is characterized in that the opaque regions (14) include at least a first opaque region (114a) and A second opaque region (114b), wherein the first opaque region (114a) has a first opacity and the second opaque region (n4b) has a A second opacity of the opacity. 18. The mask (110) according to item 17 of the scope of patent application, characterized in that the first opaque region (114a) forms a discontinuous pattern of a plurality of independent regions, a semi-continuous pattern, a pattern of independent regions, or any combination thereof. 19. The mask (110) according to item 17 or 18 of the scope of patent application, characterized in that the opaque area (114) includes a gradient opacity that gradually changes in at least one direction. 20 · If the mask (17) of item 17 or item 8 of the scope of patent application is applied, it is characterized in that the mask includes a three-dimensional profile (115), which includes a self-mask (丨 10) at least on the top A protrusion extending from one of the surface (ll0a) and the bottom surface (ll0b) and includes a substantially continuous pattern, a substantially semi-continuous pattern, an independent projection pattern, or any combination thereof, and the pattern of the projection (115) is better than Transparent area-6-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 559632 8 8 8 8 AB c D 6. The pattern of patent application Fanyuan (112) and opaque area (114) are connected together To form a merged non-random and repeating pattern. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)
TW090126284A 2000-10-24 2001-10-24 Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same TW559632B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/694,929 US6420100B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2000-10-24 Process for making deflection member using three-dimensional mask
US09/694,915 US6576090B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2000-10-24 Deflection member having suspended portions and process for making same
US09/694,946 US6576091B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2000-10-24 Multi-layer deflection member and process for making same
US09/695,155 US6743571B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2000-10-24 Mask for differential curing and process for making same
US09/695,117 US6660129B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2000-10-24 Fibrous structure having increased surface area

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW559632B true TW559632B (en) 2003-11-01

Family

ID=27542090

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW090126284A TW559632B (en) 2000-10-24 2001-10-24 Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same

Country Status (9)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1328675A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2004518830A (en)
KR (1) KR20030045132A (en)
CN (1) CN1469953A (en)
BR (1) BR0115130A (en)
CA (2) CA2696880A1 (en)
MX (1) MXPA03003593A (en)
TW (1) TW559632B (en)
WO (1) WO2002061191A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7128809B2 (en) * 2002-11-05 2006-10-31 The Procter & Gamble Company High caliper web and web-making belt for producing the same
US10655276B2 (en) * 2014-07-28 2020-05-19 Voith Patent Gmbh Method for producing or machining a roller, roller and functional layer of a roller
US10132042B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2018-11-20 The Procter & Gamble Company Fibrous structures
GB2540723B (en) * 2014-11-10 2017-09-20 De La Rue Int Ltd Improvements in watermarking
WO2017165257A1 (en) * 2016-03-24 2017-09-28 The Procter & Gamble Company Unitary deflection member for making fibrous structures
US10233593B2 (en) * 2016-03-24 2019-03-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Unitary deflection member for making fibrous structures and process for making same
CA3064406C (en) 2018-12-10 2023-03-07 The Procter & Gamble Company Fibrous structures
KR102298082B1 (en) * 2021-01-19 2021-09-03 주식회사 코코드론 Method of manufacturing multilayer bonded paper board for laser cutting
EP4328377A1 (en) * 2023-04-05 2024-02-28 Voith Patent GmbH Structuring fabric with sublayer-beads and method of producing the same

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5814190A (en) * 1994-06-29 1998-09-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Method for making paper web having both bulk and smoothness
US5948210A (en) * 1997-05-19 1999-09-07 The Procter & Gamble Company Cellulosic web, method and apparatus for making the same using papermaking belt having angled cross-sectional structure, and method of making the belt
NZ508817A (en) * 2000-12-12 2002-10-25 Humatro Corp Flexible structure comprising starch filaments

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2004518830A (en) 2004-06-24
WO2002061191A8 (en) 2003-11-13
CA2422772C (en) 2007-09-18
KR20030045132A (en) 2003-06-09
EP1328675A2 (en) 2003-07-23
MXPA03003593A (en) 2003-06-19
BR0115130A (en) 2003-09-30
WO2002061191A2 (en) 2002-08-08
CN1469953A (en) 2004-01-21
CA2422772A1 (en) 2002-08-08
WO2002061191A3 (en) 2003-01-30
CA2696880A1 (en) 2002-08-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6660129B1 (en) Fibrous structure having increased surface area
US6743571B1 (en) Mask for differential curing and process for making same
US6420100B1 (en) Process for making deflection member using three-dimensional mask
US6576091B1 (en) Multi-layer deflection member and process for making same
US6576090B1 (en) Deflection member having suspended portions and process for making same
EP3976877B1 (en) Method of making a deflection member
US5556509A (en) Paper structures having at least three regions including a transition region interconnecting relatively thinner regions disposed at different elevations, and apparatus and process for making the same
FI97552B (en) Paper-making strap and method for making it using differential light transmission technology
JPH05508450A (en) How to make a papermaking belt using a papermaking belt and textured casting surface
US11629462B2 (en) Mark and papermaking belt made therefrom
TW559632B (en) Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same
CA2076538C (en) Process for solvent delivery of chemical compounds to papermaking belts
CA2588743C (en) Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same
AU2002246850A1 (en) Fibrous structure having increased surface area and process for making same
AU704258C (en) Paper structure having at least three regions, and apparatus and process for making the same
AU731653B2 (en) Paper structure having at least three regions, and apparatus and process for making the same